Agilent Technologies Stereo System N9030a User Manual

Agilent X-Series  
Signal Analyzer  
This manual provides documentation for the  
following X-Series Analyzers:  
PXA Signal Analyzer N9030A  
MXA Signal Analyzer N9020A  
EXA Signal Analyzer N9010A  
N9061A  
Remote Language  
Compatibility Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warranty  
This Agilent technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for  
a period of one year from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, Agilent Technologies will, at  
its option, either repair or replace products that prove to be defective.  
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent  
Technologies. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies  
shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges,  
duties, and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country.  
Where to Find the Latest Information  
Documentation is updated periodically. For the latest information about this analyzer, including firmware  
upgrades, application information, and product information, see the following URLs:  
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa  
http://www.agilent.com/find/mxa  
http://www.agilent.com/find/exa  
To receive the latest updates by email, subscribe to Agilent Email Updates:  
http://www.agilent.com/find/emailupdates  
Information on preventing analyzer damage can be found at:  
http://www.agilent.com/find/tips  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
1. Getting Started  
2. Legacy Analyzer Command List  
3. Hints and Tips  
4. Programming Commands  
A1 [one]  
Clear Write for Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
A2 [two]  
Maximum Hold for Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
A3 [three]  
View Mode for Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
A4 [four]  
Blank Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
ACPALPHA  
Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
ACPALTCH  
Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
ACPBRPER  
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
ACPBRWID  
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
ACPBW  
Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
ACPCOMPUTE  
Adjacent Channel Power Compute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
ACPFRQWT  
Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
ACPLOWER  
Lower Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
ACPMAX  
Maximum Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
ACPMEAS  
Measure Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
ACPPWRTX  
Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
ACPRSLTS  
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
ACPSP  
Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
ACPT  
Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
ACPUPPER  
Upper Adjacent Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
ADJALL  
LO and IF Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
AMB  
A minus B into A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
AMBPL  
(A minus B) plus Display Line into A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
ANNOT  
Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
APB  
Trace A Plus Trace B to A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
AT  
Input Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
AUNITS  
Absolute Amplitude Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
AUTOCPL  
Auto Coupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
AXB  
Exchange Trace A and Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
B1 [one]  
Clear Write for Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
B2 [two]  
Maximum Hold for Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
B3 [three]  
View Mode for Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
B4 [four]  
Blank Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
BL  
Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
BLANK  
Blank Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
BML  
Trace B Minus Display Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
BTC  
Transfer Trace B to Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
BXC  
Exchange Trace B and Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
C2 [two]  
A Minus B Into A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
CA  
Couple Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
CARROFF  
Carrier Off Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
CARRON  
Carrier On Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
CF  
Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
CHANNEL  
Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
CHANPWR  
Channel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
CHPWRBW  
Channel Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
CLRAVG  
Clear Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
CLRW  
Clear Write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
CONTS  
Continuous Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
COUPLE  
Input Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
CR  
Couple Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
CS  
Couple Frequency Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
CT  
Couple Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
CV  
Couple Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
DA  
Display Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
DELMKBW  
Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
DET  
Detection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
DL  
Display Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
DLE  
Display Line Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
DLYSWP  
Delay Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
DONE  
Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
DR  
Display Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
E2 [two]  
Marker to Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
E3 [three]  
Delta Marker Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
E4 [four]  
Marker to Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
EDITDONE  
Edit Done . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
ERR  
Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
ET  
Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
EX  
Exchange Trace A and Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
FA  
Start Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
FB  
Stop Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
FDSP  
Frequency Display Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
FOFFSET  
Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159  
FPKA  
Fast Preselector Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161  
FREF  
Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
FS  
Full Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
GATE  
Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166  
GATECTL  
Gate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
GD  
Gate Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
GL  
Gate Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
GP  
Gate Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
GRAT  
Graticule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
HD  
Hold Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172  
I1 [one]  
Set RF Coupling to DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
I2 [two]  
Set RF Coupling to AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
IP  
Instrument Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178  
KS,  
Mixer Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
KS=  
8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
KS(  
Lock Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
KS)  
Unlock Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
KSA  
Amplitude in dBm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
KSa  
Normal Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184  
KSB  
Amplitude in dBmV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
KSb  
Positive Peak Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
KSC  
Amplitude in dBuV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187  
KSc  
A Plus B to A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
KSD  
Amplitude in Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189  
KSd  
Negative Peak Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
KSE  
Title Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
KSe  
Sample Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
KSG  
Video Averaging On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
KSg  
Display Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194  
KSH  
Video Averaging Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195  
KSh  
Display On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
KSi  
Exchange Trace B and Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
KSj  
View Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
KSK  
Marker to Next Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199  
KSk  
Blank Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
KSl  
Transfer Trace B to Trace C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202  
KSM  
Marker Noise On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
KSm  
Graticule Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
KSN  
Marker Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
KSn  
Graticule On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206  
KSO  
Marker Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
KSo  
Annotation Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208  
KSp  
Annotation On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
KST  
Fast Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
KSV  
Frequency Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211  
KSx  
External Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212  
KSy  
Video Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
KSZ  
Reference Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214  
L0 [zero]  
Display Line Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
LF  
Low Frequency Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216  
LG  
Logarithmic Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217  
LIMF  
Limit Line Frequency Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
LIMIFAIL  
Limits Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220  
LIMIPURGE  
Delete Current Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
LIMIREL  
Relative Limit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222  
LIML  
Lower-Limit Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
LIMTSL  
Slope Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224  
LIMU  
Upper-Limit Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225  
LN  
Linear Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
M2 [two]  
Marker Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228  
M3 [three]  
Delta Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
M4 [four]  
Marker Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
MA  
Marker Amplitude Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231  
MC0 [zero]  
Marker Frequency Counter Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
MC1 [one]  
Marker Frequency Counter On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
MDS  
Measurement Data Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234  
MEAN  
Trace Mean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
MEANPWR  
Mean Power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236  
MEAS  
Meas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237  
MF  
Marker Frequency Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
MINH  
Minimum Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
MINPOS  
Minimum X Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240  
MKA  
Marker Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
MKACT  
Activate Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
MKBW  
Marker Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
MKCF  
Marker to Center Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
MKD  
Marker Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
MKF  
Marker Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246  
MKFC  
Marker Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247  
MKFCR  
Marker Counter Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248  
MKMIN  
Marker Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250  
MKN  
Marker Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
MKOFF  
Marker Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253  
MKP  
Marker Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254  
MKPK  
Marker Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
MKPT  
Marker Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256  
MKPX  
Marker Peak Excursion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
MKREAD  
Marker Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258  
MKRL  
Marker to Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
MKSP  
Marker Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261  
MKSS  
Marker to Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262  
MKT  
Marker Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263  
MKTRACE  
Marker Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264  
MKTRACK  
Marker Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265  
MKTYPE  
Marker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
ML  
Mixer Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267  
MT0 [zero]  
Marker Track Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269  
MT1 [one]  
Marker Track On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270  
MXMH  
Maximum Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271  
NORMLIZE  
Normalize Trace Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272  
NRL  
Normalized Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273  
NRPOS  
Normalized Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274  
O1 [one]  
Format - Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275  
O2 [two]  
Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276  
O3 [three]  
Format - Real Amplitude Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277  
O4 [four]  
Format - One 8-Bit Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
OCCUP  
Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280  
OL  
Output Learn String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
OT  
Output Trace Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284  
PEAKS  
Peaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285  
PKPOS  
Peak Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286  
PLOT  
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287  
PP  
Preselector Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288  
PRINT  
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289  
PWRBW  
Power Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290  
R1 [one]  
Illegal Command SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291  
R2 [two]  
End-of-Sweep SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292  
R3 [three]  
Hardware Broken SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293  
R4 [four]  
Units-Key-Pressed SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294  
RB  
Resolution Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295  
RBR  
Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297  
RC  
Recall State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298  
RCLS  
Recall State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299  
REV  
Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300  
RL  
Reference Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301  
RMS  
Root Mean Square Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303  
ROFFSET  
Reference Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304  
RQS  
Request Service Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305  
S1[one]  
Continuous Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
SAVES  
Save State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308  
SER  
Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309  
SETDATE  
Set Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310  
SETTIME  
Set Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311  
SMOOTH  
Smooth Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312  
SNGLS  
Single Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313  
SP  
Frequency Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314  
SRQ  
Service Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316  
SS  
Center Frequency Step Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317  
ST  
Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318  
STB  
Status Byte Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320  
STDEV  
Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321  
SUM  
Sum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322  
SV  
Save State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324  
SWPCPL  
Sweep Couple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325  
T1 [one]  
Free Run Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326  
T2 [two]  
Line Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327  
T3 [three]  
External Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328  
T4 [four]  
Video Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329  
TA  
Trace A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330  
TB  
Trace B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331  
TDF  
Trace Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332  
TH  
Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333  
THE  
Threshold Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
TITLE  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336  
TM  
Trigger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337  
TRA  
Trace Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338  
TRB  
Trace Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339  
TRC  
Trace Data Input and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340  
TRDSP  
Trace Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341  
TRIGPOL  
Trigger Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342  
TRSTAT  
Trace State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343  
TS  
Take Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344  
VAVG  
Video Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345  
VB  
Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347  
VBO  
Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349  
VBR  
Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350  
VIEW  
View Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351  
VTL  
Video Trigger Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353  
XCH  
Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354  
5. A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Getting Started  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
N9061A Application Description  
N9061A Application Description  
The N9061A application is the remote language compatibility suite for the Agilent Technologies  
X-Series of signal analyzers. It allows the analyzers to be controlled using many of the remote  
programming commands from the following analyzers:  
8560 E/EC Series Portable Spectrum Analyzers, comprising:  
— 8560E  
— 8560EC  
— 8561E  
— 8561EC  
— 8562E  
— 8562EC  
— 8563E  
— 8563EC  
— 8564E  
— 8564EC  
— 8565E  
— 8565EC  
8566A/B  
8568A/B  
NOTE  
The 8566A/B and the 8568A/B are not considered part of the 8560 series of  
analyzers.  
The X-Series analyzer with the N9061A application installed is designed to replace these analyzers in  
many automated systems with minimal or no modification to the currently used measurement software.  
There are two options for N9061A. One is N9061A-1FP, 8566A/B and 8568A/B remote language  
compatibility, the other is N9061A-2FP, 8560 Series remote language compatibility.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Documentation for the N9061A application  
Documentation for the N9061A application  
Signal Analyzers with N9061A  
When you purchase your X-Series signal analyzer with the Remote Language Compatibility Suite  
(N9061A), this manual - the Remote Language Compatibility Guide (N9020-90119) is included on the  
documentation CD and is installed on the analyzer in the online help.  
For information on PXA series analyzers and other related documentation, refer to the PXA web site at  
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa.  
For information on MXA series analyzers and other related documentation, refer to the MXA web site at  
For information on EXA series analyzers and other related documentation, refer to the EXA web site at  
This Remote Language Compatibility Guide is not designed to be a comprehensive guide to all legacy  
commands. It gives brief descriptions of the supported commands, and highlights important functional or  
behavioral differences that you should be aware of when transferring your existing code to your X-Series  
analyzer. For a fuller description of these commands, refer to the manuals supplied with your original  
analyzer.  
Signal Analyzer Updates  
For the latest information about this instrument, including software upgrades, application information,  
and product information, please visit the URL below.  
http://www.agilent.com/find/pxa/  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Getting Started  
N9061A General Rules and Limitations  
N9061A General Rules and Limitations  
The N9061A application has been designed to emulate as closely as possible the operation of the  
specified spectrum analyzers. It is not, however, intended as an absolute direct replacement for these  
analyzers.  
Remote Control  
The N9061A application in X-Series signal analyzers supports remote operation through the GPIB  
interface. It does not support working over LAN, USB or Telnet.  
Units  
The N9061A application supports all units used in legacy products. The allowed units are HZ, KHZ,  
MHZ, GHZ, KZ, MZ, GZ, DBM, DBMV, DBUV, MV, UV, V, MW, UW, W, DB, DM, MS, US, SC,  
and S (case insensitive in 8566/68). A command terminator such as ";" also acts as a unit terminator.  
Numeric Ranges  
Numeric ranges are limited to that of the X-Series unless otherwise stated, although commands such as  
FS or IP that go to a default range will use the range of the legacy instrumentation.  
Returning Data  
The X-Series and legacy instruments have a different approach when returning data to the controller.  
The X-Series and 8560-series analyzers operate a FIFO buffer for command return values. If a command  
returns a value that the controller does not read, the returned data is stored until such a time that the  
controller requires the value. The 8566, 8568, and 8590-series legacy analyzers only store one value at a  
time. Any value stored is overwritten each time a command returns a value. The N9071A application  
handles this difference appropriately only within a single command string.  
In the case of query string, it returns the query result for the last command in the string. For example, if  
"CF?MA?FA?" is sent, the result of FA? will be returned. However, this rule does not work if the query  
is located at both sides of the "TS" command. When the command string "MA;TS;CF?" is sent, the result  
of CF? will be returned in the next query.  
AC/DC Coupling  
The 44 GHz and 50 GHz X-Series analyzers only have DC coupling. The X-Series analyzers with a 26.5  
GHz frequency range and lower, default to AC coupling on preset. The N9061A application will ensure  
that DC coupling is the default when the selected instrument is HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8563, HP8564,  
or HP8565.  
When AC coupled, the 8560E/61E/62E have a 100 kHz low frequency limit, while the X-Series  
analyzers has a 10 MHz limit.  
For HP8568A/B compatibility and consistency, the I1 and I2 commands have been supported. These  
select AC or DC coupling at the RF input. Note tht the HP8568A/B has two RF input ports in  
comparison with the X-Series, which only has one.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Getting Started  
N9061A General Rules and Limitations  
Markers  
The N9071A application emulates the behavior of legacy products. If someone uses a marker state which  
is not available in the legacy instrument, further marker behavior is undefined until instrument preset.  
On systems that supported MKACT, there are 4 completely different marker pairs, each with its own  
information. The N9061A will store the currently active value of MKACT. If MKACT is 2 then it will  
use Markers 3 and 4 instead of 1 and 2.  
Parsing  
For 8566B and 8568B, the N9061A will remember the active function and supports UP, DN, and OA, all  
of which change the active function. It also supports '?', which does not change the active function.  
One difference between N9061A and 8566/68 is that the 8566/68 parses a command for example CF  
10.3GZ, immediately when it recognizes a complete command, in this example after the GZ. However  
the N9061A parses at the end of a line when it sees the line termination sequence.  
Couplings  
To provide the most optimized use of the X-Series analyzers, the N9061A application uses the auto  
coupling features of the X-Series analyzers and does not attempt to mimic the exact behavior of coupling  
in the legacy analyzers. To eliminate the possibilities of "Meas Uncal" errors between auto and manual  
values, values will default to the X-Series auto settings where applicable (for example resolution  
bandwidth). There are several exceptions below.  
To prevent timeout errors in the legacy code, the resolution bandwidth minimum matches the minimum  
in the legacy analyzer. Resolution bandwidth steps and resolution, however, will be X-Series values.  
The video bandwidth will couple to the resolution bandwidth according to the Video bandwidth coupling  
offset value, specified by the VBO or VBR command. The X-Series analyzers sets the video bandwidth  
according to the VBO or VBR setting, but uses the X-Series analyzers available bandwidths to prevent  
'Meas Uncal' errors.  
Predefined Functions  
In the 8566/8568/8560 Series analyzers, a “predefined function” is an analyzer command that returns a  
number that can be operated on by other analyzer commands. “Predefined variables” follow the same  
idea, except the value to be passed as a parameter to the next command is stored in a variable.  
The N9061A application does not support this type of behavior, so any commands that originally acted  
as predefined functions or variables, or that allowed predefined functions or variables as arguments in  
the 8566/8568/8560 Series no longer do so.  
User-defined Functions  
No user-defined functions, traces, or variables (FUNCDEF, TRDEF or VARDEF) can be used as  
arguments or commands in programs controlling any analyzer running the N9061A application. In  
addition, the behavior of certain commands that rely on the “active functions” (UP, DN, etc.) may be  
slightly different.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Getting Started  
N9061A General Rules and Limitations  
Supported Commands  
Only a subset of the 8566/8568/8560 Series commands is supported in this application (through a GPIB  
interface). The list of supported commands was determined by feedback from our customers combined  
with technical considerations and constraints.  
EP is the enable parameter in the 8560 series that, when used as a secondary keyword after a command,  
transfers control and allows front panel operator entry. This command is supported in the N9061A  
application for the same active functions as the 8560 series, but is not displayed in any of the format  
diagrams for individual commands.  
The N9061A application supports the OA parameter that is found in several legacy commands such as  
AT and CF. OA is the equivalent of a query so that “CF OA” has a return value equivalent to “CF?”.  
Device clear is supported by the N9061A application and causes a mode preset of the signal analyzer.  
Unsupported Commands and Queries  
If a command is valid for legacy products but not supported by the N9061A application, there will be no  
error message generated, although the Command Log file will note a "Command Not Supported"  
comment. Note that this logging behavior can be controlled via the preferences menu.  
If a query is valid for legacy products but not supported by the N9061A application, it will return a "0"  
over the GPIB bus to prevent a program from hanging.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A  
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A  
One of the following Agilent signal analyzers is required to run the N9061A application.  
Table 1-1  
Compatible Agilent PXA Series Signal Analyzers  
Analyzer Model  
Number  
Upper Frequency Limit  
Firmware  
N9030A-503  
N9030A-508  
N9030A-513  
N9030A-526  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
Rev A.04.00 or later  
Rev A.04.00 or later  
Rev A.04.00 or later  
Rev A.04.00 or later  
Table 1-2  
Compatible Agilent MXA Series Signal Analyzers  
Analyzer Model  
Number  
Upper Frequency Limit  
Firmware  
N9020A-503  
N9020A-508  
N9020A-513  
N9020A-526  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
Rev A.01.64 or later  
Rev A.01.64 or later  
Rev A.01.64 or later  
Rev A.01.64 or later  
Table 1-3  
Compatible Agilent EXA Series Signal Analyzers  
Analyzer Model  
Number  
Upper Frequency Limit  
Firmware  
N9010A-503  
N9010A-507  
N9010A-513  
N9010A-526  
3.6 GHz  
7 GHz  
Rev A.01.64 or later  
Rev A.01.64 or later  
Rev A.01.64 or later  
Rev A.01.64 or later  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
For maximum compatibility, you should select an X-Series analyzer that equals or exceeds the frequency  
range of the legacy analyzer you are replacing (currently not possible for the 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC).  
The frequency limits of the legacy instruments are listed below.  
Table 1-4  
Frequency Ranges of the Legacy Analyzers  
Remote Language  
Start Frequency  
Stop Frequency  
8560E/EC  
8561E/EC  
30 Hz  
30 Hz  
2.9 GHz  
6.5 GHz  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Hardware and Firmware Requirements for N9061A  
Table 1-4  
Frequency Ranges of the Legacy Analyzers  
Remote Language  
Start Frequency  
30 Hz  
Stop Frequency  
13.2 GHz  
8562E/EC  
8563E/EC  
8564E/EC  
8565E/EC  
HP8566A  
HP8566B  
HP8568A  
HP8568B  
9 kHz  
9 kHz  
9 kHz  
2 GHz  
2 GHz  
0 Hz  
26.5 GHz  
40.0 GHz  
50.0 GHz  
22 GHz  
22 GHz  
1.5 GHz  
1.5 GHz  
0 Hz  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Installing the N9061A application  
Installing the N9061A application  
Remote language compatibility for the 8566/8568/8560 Series of analyzers is a licensed application on  
the X-Series analyzers. The option for 8560 series is N9061A-2FP and the option for 8566/8568 is  
N9061A-1FP. The application must be installed and licensed on the X-Series analyzer (PXA, MXA,  
EXA but not CXA) for it to work correctly.  
Installation  
The license is installed on the X-Series analyzer in one of the following ways:  
If you purchased a new X-Series analyzer with the N9061A application then the product is installed  
and licensed and ready to use.  
If you have an X-Series analyzer and have subsequently purchased the N9061A application then you  
can download the N9061A application from the Agilent website. The N9061A application is installed  
as part of a software upgrade. See the link below for Signal Analyzers software upgrade site. After  
upgrading your software you should then use your entitlement certificate to license the product (see  
Licensing below).  
The latest revision of the software may be downloaded from:  
NOTE  
No calibration is required after the N9061A application is installed.  
Licensing  
When you order a licensed product, you receive an entitlement certificate. Instructions are provided on  
your entitlement certificate to direct you to the Web site to redeem your certificate for a license key. You  
need to provide your instrument product number and serial number, and the entitlement certificate  
number.  
Required Information:  
Front Panel Key Path:  
Model #: (Ex. N9020A)  
Instrument  
System > Show > System  
Serial Number:  
__________________  
The license is downloaded from the license website onto a USB storage device so that it can be loaded  
into the instrument.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Getting Started  
Installing the N9061A application  
A license key is usually for one instrument model/serial number combination. The license key can only  
be installed on that instrument.  
License Installation Procedure over USB  
1. Redeem the Option Upgrade Entitlement Certificate by following the instructions on the Certificate.  
2. After redeeming your Option Upgrade Entitlement Certificate you will receive an e-mail with an  
attached License File.  
3. Locate a USB storage device and save the .lic file to the root directory of the USB storage device.  
4. Connect the USB storage device to one of the signal analyzer USB ports. Windows detects the new  
hardware and may display the configuration menu. This menu may be configured according to your  
preferences.  
5. The signal analyzer automatically consumes the license file. (This may take a few minutes) When the  
license is consumed the Agilent License Manager displays a “Successful License Installation”  
message.  
6. Alternatively the license file can be manually installed over USB or LAN by placing the license file  
in the following folder on the signal analyzer.  
C:\Program Files\Agilent\licensing  
Verify the Installation  
1. Press System > Show > System to display the list of installed applications.  
2. Verify that the new application appears in the list.  
If you require further assistance, please contact the Agilent support team.  
If you do not have access to the Internet, contact your local Agilent Technologies Sales and Service  
Office, or if in the United States, call 1-800-829-4444.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Figure 1-1 is an example mode menu map showing the N9061A (Remote Language Compatibility)  
application selection on your signal analyzer. To select the N9061A application, press the Mode hardkey  
on the X-Series analyzer front panel and then select the Remote Language Compatibility mode. If  
there are more than six modes on the signal analyzer, then use the More button to find the Remote  
Language Compatibility selection.  
Figure 1-1  
Example Mode Menu Map for X-Series Analyzers  
Mode  
Mode  
Spectrum  
Analyzer  
IQ Analyzer  
(BASIC)  
W-CDMA with  
HSDPA/PSUPPA  
Phase Noise  
Remote  
Language  
Compatibility  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Then, to select the legacy analyzer you wish to emulate, press the Mode Setup hardkey on the front  
panel. Figure 1-2 shows the menu map that allows you to select the 8560 series analyzer or 8566A/B,  
8568A/B and therefore the remote control commands to be used in the X-Series analyzer.  
Figure 1-2  
Mode Setup > Legacy Instrument Selection Menu Map  
Mode Setup  
HP8560 Series  
HP8560E/EC  
HP8561E/EC  
HP8562E/EC  
HP8563E/EC  
HP8564E/EC  
HP8565E/EC  
Mode Setup  
HP8560 series  
HP8563E/EC  
HP8566/68  
HP8566A  
HP8566/68  
HP8566B  
HP8566B  
HP8568A  
HP8568B  
Cmd Error  
On  
Off  
Logging  
Logging  
Preferences  
Preferences  
Restore Mode  
Defaults  
The HP8560 series and HP8566A/B, 8568A/B key allow you to select which legacy instrument to  
emulate. The selected instrument determines the response to the “ID?” command and affects the  
behavior of commands such as IP. You can use any command offered by any of the legacy instruments  
regardless of the language setting. However, if the command is not correct for the selected legacy  
instrument there is no guarantee that the command will work as expected. This does not affect the  
response to the SCPI command “*IDN?”.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
The legacy instrument selections are as follows:  
8560E/EC  
8561E/EC  
8562E/EC  
8563E/EC  
Selects the 8560E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8560E. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.  
Selects the 8561E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8561E. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.  
Selects the 8562E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8562E. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.  
Selects the 8563E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8563E. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5. This is the default setting for the N9061A  
application.  
8564E/EC  
8565E/EC  
HP8566A  
HP8566B  
HP8568A  
HP8568B  
Selects the 8564E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8564E. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.  
Selects the 8565E/EC remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8565E. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5.  
Selects the HP8566A remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8566A. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5 on page 30.  
Selects the HP8566B remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8566B. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5 on page 30.  
Selects the HP8568A remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8568A. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5 on page 30.  
Selects the HP8568B remote programming language and sets the response to the  
remote programming command ‘ID?’ to HP8568B. It also performs an instrument  
preset and sets Span, Trace Points, couplings, VBW/RBW ratio, and Span/RBW ratio  
appropriately as shown in Table 1-5 on page 30.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
NOTE  
Setting the remote language to anything other than ‘SCPI’ does not affect the  
response to the SCPI command ‘*IDN?’ This command will still return the model  
number and firmware version number of the X-Series signal analyzer.  
Table 1-5  
Span, Trace Points, Couplings, VBW/RBW Ratio, and Span/RBW Ratio  
Settings  
Remote  
Language  
Start Freq. Stop  
Freq.  
Number of RF  
VBW/ Span/RBW  
Trace  
Coupling  
RBW  
Ratio  
Ratio  
Points  
8560E/EC  
8561E/EC  
8562E/EC  
8563E/EC  
8564E/EC  
8565E/EC  
HP8566A  
30 Hz  
30 Hz  
30 Hz  
30 Hz  
30 Hz  
30 Hz  
2 GHz  
2.9 GHz  
601  
601  
601  
601  
601  
601  
1001  
AC  
AC  
AC  
DC  
DC  
DC  
DC  
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
91  
91  
91  
91  
91  
91  
106  
6.5 GHz  
13.2 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
40 GHz  
50 GHz  
22 GHz  
(VBW  
one  
step  
wider  
than  
RBW)  
HP8566B  
HP8568A  
2 GHz  
22 GHz  
1001  
1001  
DC  
DC  
3
106  
106  
(VBW  
one  
step  
wider  
than  
RBW)  
0 Hz  
1.5 GHz  
3
(VBW  
one  
step  
wider  
than  
RBW)  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Table 1-5  
Span, Trace Points, Couplings, VBW/RBW Ratio, and Span/RBW Ratio  
Settings  
Remote  
Language  
Start Freq. Stop  
Freq.  
Number of RF  
VBW/ Span/RBW  
Trace  
Coupling  
RBW  
Ratio  
Ratio  
Points  
HP8568B  
0 Hz  
1.5 GHz  
1001  
DC  
3
106  
(VBW  
one  
step  
wider  
than  
RBW)  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Cmd Error  
Turning Cmd Error On or Off enables or disables the display of the "CMD ERR" error messages. The  
default setting is On. The error message appears in the Message bar and also can be queried using  
“ERR?”. The error message will occur if either the command syntax or any of its parameters are  
incorrectly formed. The selected value is preserved after presetting or power cycling the instrument.  
Disabling the display of command errors disables the display of all error types.  
The format of the errors are as follows:  
1.CMD ERR, <string>  
This string will be limited to the first 20 characters of the input string (message unit).  
Further details of these errors, after they have occurred, can be reviewed in the Cmd Error Log, as long  
as Cmd Error Logging is enabled.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Logging  
The N9061A application allows the logging of errors. These errors comprise details of command errors  
and legacy commands that have been received but are not supported by the N9061A application. To  
enable and view the error log select the Mode Setup hardkey from the front panel. Then select the  
Logging softkey.  
Figure 1-3  
Logging Menu Map  
Logging  
Logging  
Previous Page  
Next Page  
Cmd Error Log  
On  
Off  
Refresh  
Clear Log  
Previous Page/Next Page  
When you are in the Logging menu, the main Signal Analysis display is obscured by the logging page.  
The most recent log starts from the bottom of the window. Previous Page and Next Page allow you to  
scroll through the log file. To include commands sent to the analyzer since the log window display was  
opened, press Refresh.  
Cmd Error Log  
The Cmd Error Log option allows you to turn the command error logging on or off. The default is Off.  
Logging should not be used in a secure environment. When set to On, all error messages are stored in a  
log file, regardless of whether they have been displayed on the screen. When set to Off, no further  
command error messages are written to the log file. Switching Cmd Error Log to Off does not clear the  
log file.  
The log file is also stored as a text file, called Logfile.txt, on the instrument. It is stored in the D:\  
drive, in a folder called \User_My_Documents\[USERNAME]\My Documents\RLC\data.  
The maximum size of the log is 10 MB. When the file reaches its maximum size, the first ten percent of  
the file is automatically discarded, to clear space for subsequent error messages.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Refresh  
To update the log page with new entries, select Refresh.  
Clear Log  
The Clear Log softkey clears the error log.  
The log can only be cleared by using the Clear Log function and cannot be cleared on power-up, remote  
language switch or mode switch.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Preferences  
The Preferences menu allows you to configure some analyzer settings when in remote language  
compatibility mode. Figure 1-4 shows the Preferences menu map that is accessed by selecting the Mode  
Setup hardkey on the front panel and then selecting the Preferences softkey. Preferences are not  
affected by a power cycle, a remote language change, a mode switching or a mode preset. They are only  
preset to their default state using Restore Mode Defaults key in the Mode Setup menu (see Figure 1-2),  
INST:DEF or SYST:PRES:PERS command.  
Figure 1-4  
Preferences Menu Map  
Preferences  
Preferences  
Limit RBW/VBW  
On  
Off  
Atten Offset  
On Off  
Swp Type Rules  
Auto  
SwpType Rule  
Legacy  
AC/DC Mode  
Best Dynamic  
Range  
RF Coupling  
As Legacy  
As Legacy  
Best Speed  
Legacy  
LimitSwpTime  
Always  
DC Coupled  
On  
Off  
Always  
AC Coupled  
Limit RBW/VBW  
Setting Limit RBW/VBW to On limits the valid resolution bandwidth (RBW) and video bandwidth  
(VBW) values to those appropriate for the currently selected remote language. While this limitation  
reduces measurement flexibility, it helps to ensure that the measurement time in emulation mode is the  
same as the legacy measurement time, and ensures that the responses to RB? and VB? match the legacy  
instrument. The default state is Off. Setting this key to Off causes the RBW and VBW filters to use the  
X-Series analyzer range of values for all remote languages.  
Atten Offset  
Setting Atten Offset to On allows larger input power to be applied to the analyzer, while significantly  
increasing the noise floor. Since many of the older spectrum analyzers had noise floor 10 dB higher than  
the X-Series analyzer, this gives the most accurate emulation. The default state is Off.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Sweep Type Rules  
Sweep Type Rules changes the Auto rules for determining whether the instrument uses FFT or Swept  
mode (this can be manually overridden). FFT mode offers substantially faster measurements in some  
cases. The HP8566A/B, 8568A/B series did not have FFT mode capability, so most accurate emulation  
requires that the instrument preserves Swept mode unless you manually overrides that setting. The  
8560-series analyzers use both FFT and Swept mode, in which case “Legacy” is equivalent to “Dynamic  
range”.  
RF Coupling  
RF Coupling allows you to override the legacy instrument behavior for AC and DC coupling. This  
command is required because legacy instruments had AC cutoff frequencies of 100 kHz and the X-series  
analyzers have an AC cutoff frequency of 10 MHz.  
As Legacy sets coupling to AC or DC whenever the legacy instrument would be set to AC or DC  
coupled mode via power on, preset, or an explicit command. Due to changes in the coupling cutoff  
frequency, measurement performance below 10 MHz while in AC-coupled mode may not match the  
legacy analyzer performance.  
Always AC sets AC coupling while in Language Compatibility Mode, overriding other instrument  
settings including power on, preset, or an explicit command. This setting maximizes instrument  
robustness, and is recommended for instruments that are not used to measure signals below 10 MHz.  
Always DC sets DC coupling while in Language Compatibility Mode, overriding other instrument  
settings including power on, preset, or explicit command. This will maximize instrument sensitivity to  
signals below 10 MHz, and may be required for measurements between 100 KHz and 10 MHz. When in  
this mode, extra care should be taken to ensure that DC voltage levels are within the allowable range for  
the X-Series analzysers.  
Limit Sweep Time  
Allows you to constrain the sweep time to no less than the minimum sweep time of the legacy  
instruments. If set to On, the sweep time will be constrained to no less than the value listed below. If set  
to Off, no constraint is applied.  
Table 1-6  
Minimum Sweep Time for the Legacy Instruments  
Instrument  
Sweep Time  
Sweep Time  
(None Zero Span) (Zero Span)  
HP8566A/B, HP8568A/B 20 ms  
HP8560 series 50 ms  
1 us  
50 us  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Setting up N9061A on the X-Series Analyzer  
Restore Mode Defaults  
Resets the state for the currently active mode by resetting the mode persistent setting to their default  
values and by performing a mode preset. This function will never cause a mode switch. This function  
performs a full preset on the active mode.  
Send Commands  
After you finish setting up the N9061A application, you can send the commands of the legacy products  
(8560 Series, 8566A/B, or 8568A/B) to X-Series analyzers. It is recomanded to use Agilent 82357B  
USB/GPIB interface and free instrument to PC connection tool Agilent IO Libraries Suite when you  
connct the instrument to a PC. For more details, visit:  
http://www.agilent.com/find/82357B  
http://www.agilent.com/find/iolib  
NOTE  
The commands can ONLY be sent via a GPIB connection. It will not work for a  
LAN connecttion.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting Started  
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands  
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands  
When a legacy remote language has been selected, you only have access to a very small subset of SCPI  
commands. If you are not familiar with the SCPI remote programming language, Chapter 5 , “A Brief  
Introduction to the SCPI Language,” on page 355 contains some useful information.  
The SCPI commands available while using other remote languages are:  
Table 1-7  
SCPI Commands  
SCPI Commands  
Description  
*IDN?  
Queries and returns the instrument identification  
string.  
*RST  
Performs an instrument preset.  
INSTrument:DEFault  
INSTrument:SELect  
Restores mode defaults.  
Selects an application by mode name. (Use RLC  
1
to select the N9061A application) .  
INSTrument:SELect?  
INSTrument:NSELect  
Selects an application by mode number. (Use 266  
to select the N9061A application) .  
INSTrument:NSELect?  
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE AUTO|SWEep|FFT  
Sets the Sweep Type.  
Defaults to AUTO.  
[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE?  
:SYSTem:OPTions?  
Returns a list of installed options.  
2
INPut:COUPling AC|DC|RLC  
Sets the input coupling.  
Defaults to RLC.  
INPut:COUPling?  
:SYSTem:LANGuage HP8560E | HP8561E | HP8562E |  
HP8563E | HP8564E | HP8565E | HP8566A | HP8566B |  
HP8568A | HP8568B  
Sets the current remote language.  
:SYSTem:LANGuage?  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:RLBC:SCPI:ENABle ON|OFF  
Toggles whether SCPI available in RLBC mode  
or not.  
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:RLBC:SCPI:ENABle ON|OFF  
Toggles whether SCPI available in RLBC mode  
or not.  
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes  
AUTO|SPEed|DRANge|LEGACY  
Sets the auto rule setting for Sweep Type.  
[:SENSe]:RLC:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes?  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Getting Started  
Running Software that Requires SCPI Commands  
Table 1-7  
SCPI Commands  
SCPI Commands  
Description  
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit ON|OFF|1|0  
Toggles legacy bandwidth limiting on and off.  
[:SENSe]:RLC:BANDwidth:LIMit?  
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe ON|OFF|1|0  
Toggles internal attenuation on and off. Defaults  
to OFF.  
[:SENSe]:RLC:ATTenuation:STATe?  
1. After changing into or out of RLC mode, allow a 1s delay before sending subsequent com-  
mands.  
2. This command is only available if the N9061A application is installed on your analyzer.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting Started  
Service and Calibration  
Service and Calibration  
Since the Performance Verification and Adjustment Software uses the SCPI command language, you  
need to exit the N9061A (RLC) application and change to the Spectrum Analyzer application prior to  
calibration or service of your Agilent signal analyzer.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
The following table lists all of the original programming commands from the legacy analyzers (that is,  
the 8566A/B, the 8568A/B, and the 8560 Series), and indicates which are supported in N9061A. Refer to  
the alphabetical listing of commands in Chapter 4 , “Programming Commands,” on page 75 for more  
detailed information about each supported command.  
Table 2-1  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Command  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Series  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
A1  
Clear-writes trace A  
Max Holds trace A  
View trace A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
A2  
A3  
A4  
Blanks trace A  
ABORT  
Interrupt operation of all  
user-defined functions  
ABS  
ACP  
Absolute  
No  
No  
No  
Performs the adjacent channel  
power measurement  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
ACPACCL  
ACPALPHA  
ACPALTCH  
ACPBRPER  
ACPBRWID  
ACPBW  
Accelerate adjacent channel  
power measurement  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Adjacent channel power alpha  
weighting  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Adjacent channel power  
alternate channels  
Adjacent channel power burst  
period  
Adjacent channel power burst  
width  
Specifies channel bandwidth for N/A  
ACP measurement  
ACPCOMPUTE  
ACPCONTM  
ACPE  
Compute adjacent channel  
power  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Performs ACP measurement in  
continuous sweep  
Adjacent channel power  
extended  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
ACPERR  
ACP measurement error query  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
ACPFRQWT  
Adjacent channel power  
frequency weighting  
ACPGR  
Adjacent channel power graph  
on or off  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
ACPGRAPH  
Compute adjacent channel  
power graph  
ACPLOWER  
ACPMAX  
Lower adjacent channel power  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Maximum adjacent channel  
power  
ACPMEAS  
ACPMETHOD  
ACPMK  
Measure adjacent channel  
power  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
Adjacent channel power  
measurement method  
Adjacent channel power marker N/A  
on or off  
N/A  
Yes  
ACPMSTATE  
Adjacent channel power  
measurement state  
N/A  
ACPPAR  
ACP manual or auto  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
ACPPWRTX  
ACPRSLTS  
Total power transmitted  
Adjacent channel power  
measurement results  
ACPSNGLM  
Performs ACP measurement in  
single sweep  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
ACPSP  
ACPT  
Channel spacing  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Adjacent channel power  
T weighting  
ACPUPPER  
ACTDEF  
Upper adjacent channel power  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Give user-defined function  
active status  
N/A  
ACTVF  
Active function  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
ACTVFUNC  
Creates a user defined active  
function  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
ADD  
Add  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
ADJALL  
ADJCRT  
ADJIF  
LO & IF adjustment  
Adjust CRT alignment  
Adjust IF  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
AMB  
Trace A trace B -> trace A  
AMBPL  
Trace A trace B + Display  
Line -> trace A  
AMPCOR  
Applies amplitude correction at  
specified frequencies  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
AMPCORDATA  
AMPCORSAVE  
AMPCORSIZE  
Amplitude correction data  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
No  
No  
Save amplitude correction data  
Amplitude correction data array N/A  
size  
AMPCORRCL  
AMPLEN  
Amplitude correction recall  
Amplitude correction length  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
ANLGPLUS  
Turns on or off the Analog+  
display mode  
ANNOT  
APB  
Display Annotation  
Trace A + trace B -> trace A  
Defines an array  
Input Attenuation  
Amplitude Units  
Auto couple  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
ARRAYDEF  
AT  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
AUNITS  
AUTO  
AUTOCPL  
AUTOEXEC  
Auto couple  
Turns on or off the function  
defined with AUTOFUNC  
AUTOFUNC  
Defines a function for automatic N/A  
execution  
N/A  
No  
AUTOSAVE  
AVG  
Automatically saves trace  
Average  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
AXB  
Exchange Traces A & B  
Yes  
Yes  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
B1  
Clear-writes trace B  
Max Holds trace B  
View trace B  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
B2  
B3  
B4  
Blanks trace B  
BAUDRATE  
BIT  
Baud rate of spectrum analyzer  
Return or receive state of bit  
Bit flag  
BITF  
BL  
Trace B Display line -> trace  
B
BLANK  
BML  
Blanks specified trace  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Trace B Display line -> trace  
B
BRD  
BTC  
Bus Read  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
Transfer trace B to C  
Bus Write  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
BWR  
BXC  
C1  
Exchange Traces B & C  
Turns off A - B  
A B -> A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
C2  
CA  
Couples Attenuation  
Calibrate  
CAL  
CARDLOAD  
Copies data from memory card  
to module memory  
CARDSTORE  
CARROFF  
CARRON  
CAT  
Copies data to memory card  
Carrier off power  
Carrier on power  
Catalog  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
CATALOG  
CF  
Catalog  
Center Frequency  
Channel selection  
Yes  
Yes  
CHANNEL  
N/A  
N/A  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
CHANPWR  
CHP  
Channel power  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Performs the channel power  
measurement  
N/A  
CHPGR  
Channel power graph on or off  
Channel power bandwidth  
Reset avg. counter to 1  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
CHPWRBW  
CLRAVG  
CLRBOX  
N/A  
N/A  
Clears a rectangular area on the N/A  
analyzer display  
N/A  
CLRDSP  
Clear display  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
No  
CLRSCHED  
Clears autosave & autoexec  
schedule buffer  
CLRW  
CLS  
Clear-writes specified trace  
Clear status byte  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
CMDERRQ  
CNF  
Command error query  
Confidence test  
CNTLA  
Auxiliary interface control line  
A
CNTLB  
CNTLC  
CNTLD  
CNTLI  
Auxiliary interface control line  
B
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
Auxiliary interface control line  
C
Auxiliary interface control line  
D
Auxiliary interface control line  
input  
CNVLOSS  
COMB  
Selects ref level offset to  
calibrate amplitude display  
Turns the comb generator on or  
off  
N/A  
COMPRESS  
CONCAT  
CONTS  
Compress  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Concat  
Continuous sweep mode  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
CORREK  
COUPLE  
CR  
Correction factors on  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Selects AC or DC coupling  
Couples Resolution BW  
CRTHPOS  
Horizontal position of CRT  
display  
N/A  
N/A  
CRTVPOS  
Vertical position of CRT  
display  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
CS  
Couples Step Size  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
CT  
Couples Sweep Time  
CTA  
Converts display units to dBm  
Converts dBm to display units  
Allows SA to control HP-IB  
Couples Video Bandwidth  
Sets display to normal size  
Sets display to full CRT size  
Sets display to expanded size  
Display Memory Address  
Set the date display format  
Display write binary  
CTM  
No  
No  
CTRLHPIB  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
CV  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
D1  
D2  
No  
No  
D3  
No  
No  
DA  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
DATEMODE  
DD  
N/A  
Yes  
DELMKBW  
Occupied power bandwidth  
within delta marker  
N/A  
N/A  
DEMOD  
Turns the demodulator on or off N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
No  
DEMODAGC  
Demodulation automatic gain  
control  
N/A  
DEMODT  
DET  
Demodulation time  
Detection Mode  
Frees Memory  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
DISPOSE  
DIV  
Divide  
No  
No  
No  
DL  
Display Line Level  
Turns the display line on/off  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
DLE  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
DLYSWP  
DN  
Delay sweep  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Reduces the active function by  
applicable step size  
N/A  
DONE  
Synchronizing function  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
DOTDENS  
Sets the dot density value in  
Analog+ display mode  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
DR  
Display Memory Address Read Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
DRAWBOX  
Draws a rectangular box on  
analyzer display  
N/A  
N/A  
DSPLY  
DT  
Display  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Define Terminator  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
DW  
E1  
Display Memory Address Write No  
Active marker to maximum  
signal  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
E2  
E3  
Active marker to center  
frequency  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Active marker frequency to CF  
step size  
E4  
Active marker to reference level Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
EDITDONE  
Indicates limit line editing is  
complete  
N/A  
N/A  
EDITLIML  
Allows current limit line to be  
edited  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
EE  
Enable entry  
Enable knob  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
EK  
ELSE  
Conditional Programming  
(If…then…else…endif)  
EM  
Erase trace C memory  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
ENDIF  
Conditional Programming  
(If…then…else…endif)  
N/A  
ENTER  
EP  
Enter from HP-IB  
No  
No  
No  
Enter parameter function  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
ERASE  
ERR  
User memory & registers erased No  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Queries the error queue  
Elapsed time  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
ET  
EX  
Exchanges trace A & B  
Exponential  
EXP  
EXTMXR  
FA  
Presets external mixing mode  
Start frequency  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
FB  
Stop frequency  
FDIAG  
FDSP  
Frequency diagnostics  
Frequency display off  
Fast fourier transform  
Marker to Auto FFT  
FFT signal clipped  
FFT continuous sweep  
Fast fourier transform kernel  
FFT markers  
Yes  
No  
FFT  
FFTAUTO  
FFTCLIP  
FFTCONTS  
FFTKNL  
FFTMKR  
FFTMM  
FFTMS  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
FFT marker to midscreen  
FFT marker to FFT stop  
frequency  
FFTOFF  
FFT off  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
FFTPCTAM  
FFT percent amplitude  
modulation  
FFTPCTAMR  
FFT percent amplitude  
modulation readout  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
FFTSNGLS  
FFTSTAT  
FFTSTOP  
FMGAIN  
FOFFSET  
FFT single sweep  
FFT status  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
FFT stop frequency  
FM gain  
Frequency offset  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
FORMAT  
Erase & format the selected  
memory device  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
FPKA  
FREF  
Fast preselector peak  
Frequency reference  
Full frequency span  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
FS  
FULBAND  
Set start/stop freq for ext mixing No  
bands  
N/A  
FUNCDEF  
GATE  
Function definition  
Turn time-gating on or off  
Gate control  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
GATECTL  
GC  
Gate preset  
GD  
Gate delay  
GDRVCLPAR  
GDRVGDEL  
Clear pulse parameters  
Gate Delay for the frequency  
window  
GDRVGLEN  
GDRVGT  
Gate length for frequency &  
time windows  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Turns gate in frequency window N/A  
on or off  
GDRVGTIM  
Gate trigger to marker position  
for time window  
N/A  
GDRVPRI  
Pulse repetition interval  
Pulse width  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
GDRVPWID  
GDRVRBW  
Couple resolution bandwidth to  
pulse width  
GDRVREFE  
GDRVST  
Enter reference edge  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Couple sweep time to pulse  
repetition interval  
GDRVSWAP  
GDRVSWDE  
Update the time or frequency  
window  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Delay sweep for time window  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
GDRVSWP  
Sweep time for the time  
window  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
GDRVUTIL  
GDRVVBW  
Turns the gate utility on or off  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Couple video bandwidth to the  
gate length  
GETPLOT  
GETPRNT  
GL  
Get plot  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Get print  
Gate length  
GP  
Sets the polarity  
(positive/negative) of the gate  
trigger  
GR  
Plot GPIB input as Graphs  
Graticule on/off  
No  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
GRAT  
HAVE  
HD  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
Checks for options installed  
Holds data entry  
HN  
Harmonic number  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
No  
HNLOCK  
HNUNLK  
I1  
Harmonic lock  
Harmonic band unlock  
Sets the RF coupling to AC  
Sets the RF coupling to DC  
Input to trace B memory  
Instrument identification  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
I2  
IB  
ID  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
IDCF  
Identified signal to center  
frequency  
IDFREQ  
IDSTAT  
IF  
Identified signal frequency  
Signal identifier status  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
No  
N/A  
No  
Conditional Programming  
(If…then…else…endif)  
No  
IFTKNL  
INT  
16 bit discrete fourier transform No  
No  
N/A  
No  
Integer  
No  
No  
INZ  
Input impedance  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
IP  
Instrument preset  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
KEYCLR  
KEYCMD  
Clear user defined keys  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Define function & label of  
softkey  
N/A  
KEYDEF  
KEYENH  
KEYEXC  
KEYLBL  
Assign function to soft key  
Key enhance  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Executes specified soft key  
Relabels softkey without  
changing its function  
N/A  
N/A  
KS,  
Mixer level  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
KS=  
HP8566: Selects factory  
preselector setting  
HP8568: Marker counter  
frequency resolution  
KS(  
KS)  
KS>  
Locks the save registers  
Unlocks the save registers  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Specifies preamp gain for signal N/A  
input 2  
KS<  
Specifies preamp gain for signal N/A  
input 1  
No  
N/A  
KS|  
Display memory address write  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
KS#  
Turns off YTX self-heating  
correction  
N/A  
KS/  
Allows preselector to be peaked No  
manually  
N/A  
No  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
KS123  
KS125  
KS126  
KS127  
Returns up to 1001 words  
display memory  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Writes up to 1001 display  
memory words  
Returns every Nth value of a  
trace  
Sets analyzer to accept binary  
display write  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
KS39  
KS43  
Writes display memory address  
in fast binary  
No  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Sets SRQ 102 when frequency  
limit exceeded  
KS91  
KS92  
Returns the amplitude error  
No  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Specifies value DL, TH, active  
mkr in display units  
KS94  
Returns code for harmonic  
number in binary  
No  
No  
N/A  
KSA  
KSa  
KSB  
KSb  
KSC  
KSc  
KSD  
KSd  
KSE  
KSe  
KSF  
Sets amplitude units to dBm  
Selects normal detection  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Sets amplitude units to dBmV  
Selects positive peak detection  
Sets amplitude units to dBuV  
Trace A + trace B -> trace A  
Sets amplitude units to V  
Selects negative peak detection  
Sets the analyzer title mode  
Selects sample detection  
HP8566: Shifts the YTO  
HP8568: Measures the Sweep  
Time  
KSf  
Recover last instrument state at  
power on  
No  
No  
N/A  
KSG  
KSg  
KSH  
KSh  
KSI  
Turns on video averaging  
Turns off the display  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Turns off video averaging  
Turns on the display  
Allows the reference level to be No  
extended  
KSi  
Exchanges traces B & C  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
KSJ  
KSj  
Manual control of DACs  
Views trace C  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
KSK  
HP8566: Active Mkr to next  
highest peak  
HP8568: Counts pilot IF at  
marker  
KSk  
KSL  
KSl  
Blanks trace C  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Turns off marker noise function Yes  
Moves trace B into trace C  
Turns on marker noise function  
Turns off the graticule  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
KSM  
KSm  
KSN  
Marker minimum value  
detected  
KSn  
KSO  
KSo  
KSP  
KSp  
KSQ  
KSq  
Turns on the graticule  
Marker span  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Turns off the annotation  
GPIB address  
Turns on the annotation  
Unlocks frequency band  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Decouples IF gain and input  
attenuation  
No  
No  
KSR  
KSr  
Turns on service diagnostics  
Sets service request 102  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
KSS  
HP8566: Fast GPIB operation  
HP8568: Determine second LO  
frequency  
KST  
KSt  
HP8566: Fast preset  
HP8568: Shifts second LO  
down  
Yes  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
HP8566: Locks frequency band No  
HP8568: Continues sweep from  
marker  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
KSU  
KSu  
HP8566: External mixer preset  
HP8568: Shift second LO up  
No  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Stops the sweep at the active  
marker  
KSV  
KSv  
Frequency offset  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
HP8566: External mixer  
frequency identifier  
HP8568: Inhibits phase lock  
KSW  
KSw  
Amplitude error correction  
routine  
No  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Displays amplitude error  
correction routine  
KSX  
KSx  
KSY  
KSy  
KSZ  
KSz  
L0  
Amplitude correction factors on No  
Sets trigger mode to external Yes  
Amplitude correction factors off No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Sets trigger mode to video  
Reference level offset  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Sets the display storage address No  
Turns off the display line  
Writes text label  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
LB  
LCLVAR  
LF  
Defines a local variable for use  
Preset 02.5GHz  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
LG  
Selects log scale  
LIMD  
Delta amplitude value for limit  
line segment  
LIMF  
Frequency value for limit-line  
segment  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
LIMIDEL  
LIMIDISP  
Erase contents of limit line table N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Controls when the limit line(s)  
are displayed  
N/A  
LIMIFAIL  
Limit line fail  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
LIMIFT  
Select frequency or time limit  
line  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
LIMIHI  
Upper limit  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
LIMILINE  
LIMILO  
Limit line  
Lower limit  
LIMIMIRROR  
LIMIMODE  
LIMIPURGE  
Mirror limit line  
Limit line entry mode  
Disposes of current limit line,  
not limit line table  
LIMIRCL  
LIMIREL  
LIMISAV  
LIMISEG  
LIMISEGT  
LIMITEST  
LIML  
Load stored limit line into limit  
line table  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Determine whether limit line  
values absolute/relative  
Yes  
No  
Save contents of limit line table N/A  
for recall  
Define slope & offset of limit  
line segments  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Enter limit line segment for  
sweep time  
Compare active trace data to  
limit line parameters  
Amplitude value for limit line  
segment in lower limit line  
LIMM  
Middle amplitude value for  
limit-line segment  
LIMTFL  
LIMTSL  
LIMU  
Specifies a flat limit-line  
segment  
Specifies a sloped limit-line  
segment  
Yes  
Yes  
Amplitude value for limit line  
segment in upper limit line  
LINFILL  
LL  
Line fill  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Provides lower left recorder  
output voltage at rear  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
LN  
Selects linear scale  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
LOAD  
Load article/file into internal  
memory  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
LOG  
LOLIMOFF  
LSPAN  
M1  
Log  
No  
No  
No  
LO Limit Off  
Last span  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Turns off all markers  
Marker Normal  
Marker Delta  
Marker zoom  
M2  
M3  
M4  
MA  
Returns the amplitude of active  
marker  
MBIAS  
MBRD  
MBWR  
MC0  
Mixer bias  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
No  
Processor memory block read  
Processor memory block write  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
No  
Turns off the marker frequency  
counter  
N/A  
Yes  
MC1  
Turns on the marker frequency  
counter  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
MDS  
Measurement data size  
Measurement data units  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
MDU  
MEAN  
Returns mean value of trace in  
display units  
Yes  
Yes  
MEANPWR  
MEANTH  
MEAS  
Mean power measurement  
Trace mean above threshold  
Measurement status  
Measurement off  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
MEASOFF  
MEASURE  
MEM  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Measure mode  
Returns amount of memory  
available  
MENU  
Menu  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
MERGE  
MF  
Merge two traces  
No  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
Returns frequency of the active  
marker  
Yes  
Yes  
MIN  
Minimum  
Min Hold  
No  
No  
No  
MINH  
MINPOS  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Returns the minimum position  
in the trace  
MIRROR  
MKA  
Mirror image of the trace  
Amplitude of the active marker  
Specifies the active marker  
Marker as the active function  
Marker bandwidth  
No  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
MKACT  
MKACTV  
MKBW  
MKCF  
Moves the active marker to  
center frequency  
MKCHEDGE  
MKCONT  
Marker to channel edge  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
No  
Continues sweeping from the  
marker after stop  
N/A  
MKD  
Delta marker  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
MKDELCHBW  
Delta markers to channel power N/A  
bandwidth  
N/A  
MKDLMODE  
MKDR  
Marker delta display line mode  
Reciprocal of marker delta  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
MKF  
Specifies the frequency of the  
active marker  
Yes  
MKFC  
Turns the marker frequency  
counter on or off  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
MKFCR  
MKMCF  
MKMIN  
Specifies the marker frequency  
counter resolution  
Marker mean to center  
frequency  
Moves active marker to  
minimum signal detected  
Yes  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
MKN  
Normal marker  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
MKNOISE  
MKOFF  
Marker noise function  
Turns all markers or the active  
marker off  
MKP  
Specifies the horizontal position Yes  
of the marker  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
MKPAUSE  
Pauses the sweep at the active  
marker  
No  
MKPK  
MKPT  
Marker peak  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Marker peak threshold  
Marker peak excursion  
Specifies marker readout mode  
MKPX  
MKREAD  
MKRL  
Moves the active marker to  
reference level  
MKSP  
Marker span  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
MKSS  
Marker step size  
MKSTOP  
Stops the sweep at the active  
marker  
MKT  
Position marker in units of time N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
MKTBL  
Marker table  
Marker trace  
N/A  
Yes  
MKTRACE  
MKTRACK  
Turns the marker signal track on Yes  
or off  
MKTYPE  
Specifies the type of active  
marker to be used  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
ML  
Mixer Level  
Modulo  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
MOD  
MODE  
MODRCLT  
Mode of operation  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Recalls trace from module  
memory  
MODSAVT  
Saves trace in module memory  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
MOV  
Move  
No  
No  
No  
MPY  
Multiply  
No  
No  
No  
MRD  
Memory Read  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
MRDB  
MSDEV  
MSI  
Memory read byte  
Specifies mass storage device  
Mass storage interface  
Turns off marker signal track  
Turns on marker signal track  
Memory Write  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
MT0  
MT1  
MWR  
MWRB  
MXM  
Memory write byte  
Maximum  
No  
No  
No  
No  
MXMH  
MXRMODE  
NDB  
Max Hold  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
Mixer mode  
Number of dB  
N/A  
N/A  
NDBPNT  
Turns the N dB points function  
on or off  
NDBPNTR  
NORMLIZE  
NRL  
N dB points bandwidth  
Normalize trace data  
Normalized reference level  
Normalized reference position  
Start harmonic  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
NRPOS  
NSTART  
NSTOP  
O1  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Stop harmonic  
No  
Output format  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
O2  
Output format  
Yes  
O3  
Output format  
Yes  
O4  
Output format  
Yes  
OA  
Returns the active function  
value  
Yes  
OBW  
Occupied bandwidth  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
OBWBW  
Bandwidth measured by  
occupied bandwidth  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
OBWFERR  
OBWLOWER  
Occupied bandwidth transmit  
frequency error  
Relative lower frequency limit  
of occupied bandwidth  
OBWPCT  
OBWPWR  
Occupied bandwidth percent  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Total power in the occupied  
bandwidth  
OBWUPPER  
OCCUP  
Relative upper frequency limit  
of occupied bandwidth  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Percent occupied power  
bandwidth  
OL  
Output learn string  
On cycle  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
ONCYCLE  
ONDELAY  
ONEOS  
ONMKR  
ONMKRU  
ONPWRUP  
ONSRQ  
ONSWP  
ONTIME  
OP  
On delay  
On end of sweep  
On marker pause  
On marker update  
On power up  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
On service request  
On sweep  
On time  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
Output parameters  
Set position of origin  
Output trace annotations  
OR  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
No  
OT  
N/A  
No  
OUTPUT  
Output - sending data to the  
GPIB from function  
PA  
Plot absolute  
Parallel status  
No  
No  
No  
PARSTAT  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
PCTAM  
Turns the percent AM  
measurement on or off  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
PCTAMR  
PD  
Percent AM response  
Pen down  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
PDA  
Probability distribution  
amplitude  
No  
No  
No  
PDF  
Probability distribution  
frequency  
No  
No  
No  
PEAKS  
Sorts the signal peaks by  
amplitude/frequency  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
PKDLMODE  
Peak table delta display line  
mode  
PKPOS  
PKRES  
PKSORT  
Peak position  
Peak result  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Selects how to sort signal peaks N/A  
listed in peak table  
PKTBL  
PKZMOK  
PKZOOM  
PLOT  
Turns the peak table on or off  
Peak zoom okay  
Peak zoom  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
Prints the screen  
Display origins  
Plot source  
PLOTORG  
PLOTSRC  
PLTPRT  
POWERON  
PP  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
No  
Plot port  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
Power on state  
Peaks the preselector  
Plot relative  
PR  
No  
PREAMPG  
PREFX  
External preamplifier gain  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Change user memory entries  
file prefix  
PRINT  
Print  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
PRNPRT  
Print port  
N/A  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
PRNTADRS  
PS  
Print address  
Skip page  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
PSDAC  
PSTATE  
PU  
Preselector DAC number  
Protect state  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
No  
Pen up  
No  
PURGE  
PWRBW  
PWRUPTIME  
Q0  
Purge file  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Power bandwidth  
Power up time  
Sets detector to EMI Peak  
detection  
Q1  
Sets detector to Quasi Peak  
detection  
No  
No  
N/A  
R1  
R2  
Resets service request 140  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Allows service request 140 &  
104  
R3  
R4  
Allows service request 140 &  
110  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Allows service request 140 &  
102  
RB  
Resolution bandwidth  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
RBR  
Resolution bandwidth/Span  
ratio  
N/A  
N/A  
RC  
Recalls state register  
Recall open/short average  
Recall state  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
RCLOSCAL  
RCLS  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
RCLT  
Recall trace  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
RCLTHRU  
Recall internal thru-reference  
trace into trace B  
RELHPIB  
REPEAT  
Release control of GPIB  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
No  
No  
Conditional Programming  
(Repeat .. Until …)  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
RESETRL  
RETURN  
Reset reference level  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Return to user defined function  
origination point  
REV  
Returns the revision string to  
the controller  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
RL  
Reference level  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
RLCAL  
RLPOS  
RMS  
Reference level calibration  
Reference level position  
Root mean square  
Reference level offset  
SRQ mask  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
ROFFSET  
RQS  
S1  
Continuous sweep mode  
Single sweep mode  
Adds a limit line segment  
Save menu  
S2  
SADD  
SAVEMENU  
SAVES  
N/A  
Yes  
Saves analyzer state to specified Yes  
register  
SAVET  
Save trace  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
SAVRCLF  
SAVRCLN  
SAVRCLW  
SDEL  
Save or recall flag  
Save or recall number  
Save or recall data  
Deletes a limit line segment  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
SDON  
Indicates limit line segment is  
done  
No  
SEDI  
Edits limit line segment  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
SEGDEL  
Delete specified segment from  
limit line tables  
N/A  
SENTER  
Segment entry for frequency  
limit lines  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
SENTERT  
Segment entry for sweep time  
limit lines  
N/A  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
SER  
Serial number  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
SETDATE  
Set the date of spectrum  
analyzer  
SETTIME  
Set the time of spectrum  
analyzer  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
SHOWMENU  
SIGDEL  
Shows menu  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Signal amplitude delta  
N/A  
No  
SIGID  
External mixing frequency  
bands signal identifier  
No  
SKYCLR  
SKYDEF  
SMOOTH  
Clears user softkey  
Defines user softkey  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Smooths given trace over  
specified number points  
SNGLS  
SP  
Single sweep mode  
Frequency Span  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
SPEAKER  
Turns the internal speaker on or N/A  
off  
SPZOOM  
SQLCH  
SQR  
Span Zoom  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Sets the squelch threshold  
Square root  
SQUELCH  
SRCALC  
Adjusts squelch level  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Selects internal or external level N/A  
control  
No  
SRCAT  
Attenuate source output level  
Coarse tracking adjust  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
SRCCRSTK  
SRCFINTK  
SRCNORM  
SRCPOFS  
SRCPSTP  
SRCPSWP  
Fine tracking adjust  
No  
Source normalization  
N/A  
No  
Offset source power level  
Select source power step size  
No  
Select sweep range of source  
output  
No  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
SRCPWR  
SRCTK  
Select source power level  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Adjust tracking of source output N/A  
with SA sweep  
N/A  
SRCTKPK  
Auto adjust tracking of source  
output with SA sweep  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
SRQ  
SS  
Service request  
Frequency Step Size  
Sweep Time  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
ST  
STB  
STDEV  
Status byte query  
Standard deviation of trace  
amplitude  
STOR  
Store file  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
STOREOPEN  
STORESHORT  
STORETHRU  
Save current instrument state  
Store short  
No  
Store thru-calibration trace in  
trace B  
No  
SUB  
Subtract  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
SUM  
Sum of trace element  
Yes  
amplitudes in display units  
SUMSQR  
Squares trace element  
No  
No  
No  
amplitudes & returns sum  
SV  
Saves state  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
No  
SW  
Skip to next control instruction  
Sweep couple  
SWPCPL  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
SWPOUT  
Sweep output  
SYNCMODE  
Synchronize mode  
Turns the threshold level off  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
T0  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
Sets the trigger mode to free run Yes  
Sets the trigger mode to line Yes  
Sets the trigger mode to external Yes  
Sets the trigger mode to video Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
T7  
T8  
TA  
Sets the trigger mode to level  
Sets the trigger mode to edge  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Returns trace A amplitude  
values to controller  
TB  
Returns trace B amplitude  
values to controller  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
TDF  
Trace data format  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
TEXT  
Writes text on the analyzer  
screen  
TH  
Threshold  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
N/A  
No  
THE  
THEN  
Turns the threshold on or off  
Conditional Programming  
(If…then…else…endif)  
TIMEDATE  
TIMEDSP  
Allows setting of time & date  
for analyzer  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Enables display of time & data  
on analyzer display  
N/A  
TITLE  
TM  
Title entry  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Trigger Mode  
TOI  
Third order intermodulation  
measurement  
N/A  
N/A  
TOIR  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
Third order intermodulation  
response  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Returns trace A amplitude  
values to controller  
Returns trace B amplitude  
values to controller  
Returns trace C amplitude  
values to controller  
TRCMEM  
TRDEF  
Trace C memory  
Trace define  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
TRDSP  
Trace display  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
TRGRPH  
Trace graph display  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
TRIGPOL  
TRMATH  
Trigger polarity  
N/A  
N/A  
No  
Yes  
Executes specified trace math at No  
end of sweep  
N/A  
TRPRST  
TRSTAT  
Sets trace operations to their  
preset values  
No  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
Returns current trace states to  
controller  
Yes  
Yes  
TS  
Takes a sweep  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
TVLINE  
Selects which horizontal line of N/A  
video to trigger on  
N/A  
N/A  
TVLSFRM  
Selects the type of video frame  
to trigger on  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
TVSTND  
TVSYNC  
TV standard  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Selects polarity of video  
modulation to trigger on  
TWNDOW  
UNTIL  
UP  
Formats trace information for  
FFT.  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
No  
Conditional Programming  
(Repeat…Until…)  
No  
Increases active function value  
by applicable step  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
No  
N/A  
N/A  
UR  
Upper right x-y recorder output  
voltage at rear  
USTATE  
Configures user defined states  
Variable definition  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
N/A  
No  
VARDEF  
VARIANCE  
Returns the amplitude variance  
of specified trace  
No  
VAVG  
VB  
Turns video averaging on or off Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
N/A  
Video Bandwidth  
Yes  
Yes  
VBO  
Video Bandwidth Coupling  
Offset  
VBR  
Video Bandwidth Ratio  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
Table 2-1  
Command  
Alphanumeric List of all Legacy Commands Showing their N9061A Support  
Description  
8566  
8568  
8560  
Page for  
Further  
Details  
Series  
VIEW  
Stores and views the specified  
trace  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
VTL  
Video trigger level  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
WAIT  
Suspend program operation for  
specified time  
N/A  
WINNEXT  
WINOFF  
Next window  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Turns off the window display  
mode  
WINON  
Turns on the window display  
mode  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
WINZOOM  
XCH  
Window zoom  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
Yes  
N/A  
N/A  
Exchanges the two specified  
traces.  
ZMKCNTR  
Zone marker at center  
frequency  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
ZMKPKNL  
ZMKPKNR  
ZMKSPAN  
Zone marker for next peak left  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Zone marker for next peak right N/A  
Zone marker span N/A  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legacy Analyzer Command List  
Table of All Legacy Analyzer Commands  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Hints and Tips  
This chapter includes a list of helpful hints and tips that will help you get the most from the N9061A  
application on your X-Series analyzer.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hints and Tips  
Hints and Tips  
Hints and Tips  
These pages lists a few hints and tips that will help you get the most from your analyzer and the N9061A  
application.  
Compatibility - speed and consistency - for best compatibility with your legacy analyzer, the  
N9061A application should be used on the analyzer whose frequency range most closely matches the  
frequency range of your legacy analyzer. For example, the best match for the 8563E with its 26.5  
GHz upper frequency limit is X-Series analyzer which also has an upper frequency limit of 26.5  
GHz.  
Compatibility and Sweep Times - for best compatibility between X-Series analyzers and the legacy  
analyzers, use the Manual Swept mode for 8566A/B, 8568A/B Series analyzers. Manual Swept mode  
is the default setting on X-Series analyzers with N9061A installed.  
When analyzing stationary signals, you can change to the Best Speed setting, which is accessed from  
the Mode Setup > Preferences > Swp Type Rule menu. This results in faster sweep times on a  
X-Series analyzer than on the legacy analyzers because of the X-Series analyzer’s better  
performance. In the majority of applications, this faster speed would be desirable, but that is not  
always the case.  
Time-out - Agilent recommends increasing the timeout on a serial poll (SPOLL) due to differences in  
Sweep Times on some settings. Note, however, that this may not be necessary when using the Best  
Speed setting on the Preferences > Swp Type Rule menu (accessed from the Mode Setup hardkey).  
Synchronization (1) - to synchronize after an IP command, Agilent recommends that you use the  
DONE command. We also suggest that the DONE command is used in conjunction with a timeout of  
about 5 seconds in case the analyzer starts to auto align. Alternatively, you could set auto alignment  
to Off. To set auto alignment to Off, press System, Alignments, Auto Align on the front panel.  
Synchronization (2) - Agilent recommends that synchronization (using the DONE command) is  
used with marker functions when signal tracking is turned on.  
Changing Modes - After changing into or out of RLC mode, allow at least a 1 second delay before  
sending subsequent commands.  
AC and DC Coupling - The 8560 Series of legacy analyzers have one RF input port, and support AC  
The 8568A/B has two RF input ports:  
— DC Coupled (with a BNC connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 Hz to 1.5 GHz  
— AC Coupled (with an N Type connector) to handle a frequency range of 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz  
WARNING  
If the input signal to the X-series analyzer has a DC component, ensure that  
when you select a legacy instrument with a possible coupling change to DC,  
the input signal does not exceed the input specifications of the X-series  
analyzer.  
The X-series analyzers also have one RF input port. When using the X-Series analyzers, you must use  
DC coupling to see calibrated frequencies of less than 20 MHz. Signals of less than 20 MHz are not  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Hints and Tips  
Hints and Tips  
calibrated when using AC coupling on these analyzers.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hints and Tips  
Hints and Tips  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Programming Commands  
This chapter lists all the supported 8560 Series, 8566A/B and 8568A/B compatible commands in  
alphanumeric order, and gives brief details on their syntax and operation. For more detailed information  
on these commands, see your 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series User’s Guide.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Commands  
Command Syntax  
Command Syntax  
Command syntax is represented pictorially.  
Ovals enclose command mnemonics. The command mnemonic must be entered as shown with the  
exception that the case can be upper or lower.  
Circles and ovals surround secondary keywords or special numbers and characters. The characters in  
circles and ovals are considered reserved words and must be entered as shown with the exception that  
the case can be upper or lower.  
Rectangles contain the description of a syntax element defined in Table 4-1, “Syntax Elements.”  
A loop above a syntax element indicates that the syntax element can be repeated.  
Solid lines represent the recommended path.  
Dotted lines indicate an optional path for bypassing secondary keywords or using alternate units.  
Arrows and curved intersections indicate command path direction.  
Semicolons are the recommended command terminators. Using semicolons makes programs easier to  
read, prevents command misinterpretation, and is recommended by IEEE Standard 728.  
NOTE  
Uppercase is recommended for entering all commands unless otherwise noted.  
Syntax Elements are shown in the syntax diagrams as elements within rectangles. In the syntax  
diagrams, characters and secondary keywords are shown within circles or ovals.  
Table 4-1  
Syntax Elements  
Syntax Component  
Definition/Range  
Any analyzer command in this chapter, with required parameters and terminators.  
Analyzer command  
Character  
S a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z databyte.  
P
Character & EOI  
8-bit byte containing only character data and followed by end-or-identify (EOI)  
condition, where the EOI control line on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the  
transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Programming Commands  
Command Syntax  
Table 4-1  
Syntax Elements  
Syntax Component  
Definition/Range  
Character string  
Data byte  
A list of characters.  
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data.  
Data byte & EOI  
8-bit byte containing numeric or character data followed by end-or-identify (EOI)  
condition, where the EOI control line on GPIB is asserted to indicate the end of the  
transmission. END signifies the EOI condition.  
Delimiter  
| \ @ ˆ $ % ; ! Matching characters that mark the beginning and end of a character  
string, or a list of analyzer commands. Choose delimiting characters that are not used  
within the string they delimit.  
Digit  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
lsb length  
Represents the least significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of  
bytes returned or transmitted. See msb length.  
msb length  
Number  
Represents the most significant byte of a two-byte word that describes the number of  
bytes returned or transmitted. See lsb length.  
Expressed as integer, decimal, or in exponential (E) form.  
308  
Real Number Range: 1.797693134862315 × 10 , including 0.  
Up to 15 significant figures allowed.  
308  
Numbers may be as small as 2.225073858507202 × 10  
Integer Number Range: 32,768 through +32,767  
Output termination  
Units  
Line feed (L ) and end-or-identify (EOI) condition. ASCII code 10 (line feed) is sent  
F
via GPIB and the end-or-identify control line on GPIB sets to indicate the end of the  
transmission.  
Represent standard scientific units.  
Frequency Units: GZ, GHZ, MZ, MHZ, KZ, KHZ, HZ  
Amplitude Units: DB, DBMV, DM, DBM, DBUV, V, MV, UV, W, MW, UW  
Time Units: SC, S, MS, US  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Programming Commands  
Programming Command Descriptions  
Programming Command Descriptions  
All supported commands are listed here, along with their descriptions and cross-references to similar  
commands.  
This chapter is not designed to be a comprehensive guide to all 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560 Series  
commands. It gives brief descriptions of the supported commands, and highlights important functional or  
behavioral differences that you should be aware of when transferring existing 8566A/B, 8568A/B, 8560  
Series code to your X-Series analyzer. For a fuller description of the commands, refer to the 8566A/B,  
8568A/B, 8560 Series Operating and Programming Manual.  
To avoid confusion between numbers and letters, all commands that incorporate numbers have had the  
number spelled out and placed in square brackets after the command. For example, the command ‘I1’ is  
shown as ‘I1 [one]’ - that is, the capital letter ‘I’ followed by the number ‘1’, and then the word ‘one’  
italicized in square brackets. The italicized word in brackets does not form part of the command.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Commands  
A1 [one] Clear Write for Trace A  
A1 [one]  
Clear Write for Trace A  
Syntax  
;
A1  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The A1 command sets Trace A to clear write which means that it continuously displays any signal  
present at the analyzer input. The A1 command initially clears Trace A, setting all elements to zero.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command A1 are identical to the CLRW TRA command  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
A2 [two] Maximum Hold for Trace A  
A2 [two]  
Maximum Hold for Trace A  
Syntax  
;
A2  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The A2 command updates each trace element with the maximum level detected during the period that the  
trace has been active.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command A2 are identical to the MXMH TRA command  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
A3 [three] View Mode for Trace A  
A3 [three]  
View Mode for Trace A  
Syntax  
;
A3  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The A3 command displays Trace A and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A does  
not get updated with new data.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command A3 are identical to the VIEW TRA command  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
A4 [four] Blank Trace A  
A4 [four]  
Blank Trace A  
Syntax  
;
A4  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The A4 command blanks Trace A and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace A is not  
updated.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command A4 are identical to the BLANK TRA command  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
ACPALPHA Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting  
ACPALPHA  
Adjacent Channel Power Alpha Weighting  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
ACPALPHA  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
This command sets the alpha weighting for ACP measurements.  
Range: Any real number between 0 and 1  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPALTCH Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels  
ACPALTCH  
Adjacent Channel Power Alternate Channels  
Syntax  
SP  
;
ACPALTCH  
0
1
LF  
2
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPALTCH command sets the number of alternate channels to be measured by an adjacent channel  
power measurement to either 0, 1, or 2. The number of alternate channels is used with the ACPRSLTS  
Range:  
0, 1, or 2.  
0.  
Default value:  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
ACPBRPER Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period  
ACPBRPER  
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Period  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
ACPBRPER  
S
MS  
US  
SC  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPBRPER command sets the cycle time (period) of the burst RF signal. The cycle time is needed  
to set the sweep times when using the peak, two bandwidth, burst power, and gated methods for adjacent  
channel power measurements.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only and therefore, although the user can set ACPBRPER, it does not do  
anything when in RLC mode.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPBRWID Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width  
ACPBRWID  
Adjacent Channel Power Burst Width  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
ACPBRWID  
S
MS  
US  
SC  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPBRWID command sets the on-time (pulse width) of the burst RF signal. The pulse width is  
needed to set the gating times when using the gated method for adjacent channel power measurements.  
Range  
5 μs to 9.5 seconds  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only and therefore, although the user can set ACPBRWID, it does not do  
anything when in RLC mode.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPBW Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth  
ACPBW  
Adjacent Channel Power Bandwidth  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
ACPBW  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
UP  
DOWN  
MZ  
GZ  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPBW command sets the bandwidth of the channels as an active function for the ACPMEAS  
(page 92) and ACPCOMPUTE (page 88) commands.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPCOMPUTE Adjacent Channel Power Compute  
ACPCOMPUTE  
Adjacent Channel Power Compute  
Syntax  
;
ACPCOMPUTE  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Calculates the ACP of a transmitter based on data on the display. This function does not make a new  
measurement before computing. The measurement must have been made with ANALOG or PEAK  
method selected so the appropriate data is available for the calculation.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
ACPFRQWT Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting  
ACPFRQWT  
Adjacent Channel Power Frequency Weighting  
Syntax  
SP  
;
ACPFRQWT  
RRCOS  
OFF  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPFRQWT command is used to control the frequency weighting when making an Adjacent  
Channel Power measurement. Weighting is not used in the measurement if OFF has been selected.  
Root-raised-cosine weighting is selected with the RRCOS parameter.  
Default value:  
OFF  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPLOWER Lower Adjacent Channel Power  
ACPLOWER  
Lower Adjacent Channel Power  
Syntax  
;
ACPLOWER  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPLOWER query command returns the power ratio result of the Adjacent Channel Power  
measurement for the lower frequency channel.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPMAX Maximum Adjacent Channel Power  
ACPMAX  
Maximum Adjacent Channel Power  
Syntax  
;
ACPMAX  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
The ACPMAX query command returns the maximum adjacent channel power of the adjacent channel  
power measurement.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPMEAS Measure Adjacent Channel Power  
ACPMEAS  
Measure Adjacent Channel Power  
Syntax  
;
ACPMEAS  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPMEAS command makes a measurement and calculates the adjacent channel power (ACP) of a  
transmitter. The measurement determines the leakage power that is in the channels adjacent to the  
carrier. The result is the ratio of the leakage power in the channel adjacent to the total power transmitted  
by the transmitter.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
ACPMSTATE Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State  
ACPMSTATE  
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement State  
Syntax  
SP  
;
ACPMSTATE  
CURR  
DFLT  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Sets the parameters of the measurement state to either the default state (determined by the setup) or the  
current state. The state parameters that could change between the default state and a current state  
include:  
Resolution bandwidth  
Video bandwidth  
Span  
Sweep time  
Detector mode  
Gating parameters  
Trigger parameters  
Video averaging  
Default value:  
DFLT  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPPWRTX Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted  
ACPPWRTX  
Adjacent Channel Power Total Power Transmitted  
Syntax  
;
ACPPWRTX  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPPWRTX query command returns the result of the total power transmitted calculation of the  
adjacent channel power measurement. The measurement must be made with the analog or burst power  
method selected.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPRSLTS Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results  
ACPRSLTS  
Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Results  
Syntax  
;
ACPRSLTS  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Returns an array of power data resulting from an ACP measurement of an RF signal. The number of  
alternate channel pairs selected by the ACPALTCH (page 84) command determines the size of the array.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
ACPSP Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing  
ACPSP  
Adjacent Channel Power Channel Spacing  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
ACPSP  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
UP  
MZ  
DOWN  
GZ  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
ACPT Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting  
ACPT  
Adjacent Channel Power T Weighting  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
ACPT  
S
MS  
US  
SC  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPT command is used to set the T used in weighting for an adjacent channel power measurement.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ACPUPPER Upper Adjacent Channel Power  
ACPUPPER  
Upper Adjacent Channel Power  
Syntax  
;
ACPUPPER  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ACPUPPER query command returns the power ratio result of the adjacent channel power  
measurement for the upper frequency channel.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application supports the ACP measurement using the ANALOG  
method only.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ADJALL LO and IF Adjustments  
ADJALL  
LO and IF Adjustments  
Syntax  
;
ADJALL  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ADJALL command activates the RF local oscillator (LO) and intermediate frequency (IF)  
alignment routines. These are the same routines that occur when the analyzer is switched on. They are  
also the same routines that are performed when you press System, Alignments, Align Now, All.  
Commands following ADJALL are not executed until after the analyzer has finished the alignment  
routines.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
AMB A minus B into A  
AMB  
A minus B into A  
Syntax  
SP  
;
AMB  
ON  
OFF  
LF  
SP  
1
0
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The AMB command subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends  
the results to Trace A. Thus, AMB can restore the original trace after an APB (page 103) or a KSc  
(page 188) command has been executed.  
The query command AMB? returns different responses depending on the language being used. The 8560  
Series languages return either a 1 or a 0 to indicate the On or Off status.The 8566, 8568 Series languages  
all return either ON or OFF.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command AMB are identical to the C2 [two] command  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
AMBPL (A minus B) plus Display Line into A  
AMBPL  
(A minus B) plus Display Line into A  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
;
AMBPL  
ON  
OFF  
LF  
SP  
1
0
CR  
SP  
,
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
;
AMBPL  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The AMBPL command does a point-by-point subtraction of Trace B from Trace A, and then adds the  
display line point values to the difference. The results are sent to Trace A.  
The query command AMBPL? returns different responses depending on the language being used.  
Query response is either 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state for 8560 series, is ON or OFF indicating state  
for 8566A/B, 8568A/B.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ANNOT Annotation  
ANNOT  
Annotation  
Syntax  
SP  
;
ANNOT  
ON  
OFF  
LF  
SP  
1
0
CR  
SP  
,
?
Preset State: ANNOT ON  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The ANNOT command turns on or off all annotation on the analyzer display. Softkey labels are not  
affected by this command and remain displayed.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command ANNOT are identical to the KSo command  
(page 208) and KSp command (page 209). Note also that these two alternative  
commands, KSo and KSp, are only valid when the remote language is either  
HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
APB Trace A Plus Trace B to A  
APB  
Trace A Plus Trace B to A  
Syntax  
;
APB  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The APB command does a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to  
Trace A. Thus, APB can restore the original trace after an AMB (page 100) or a C2 (page 120) command  
has been executed.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command APB are identical to the KSc command (page 188).  
Note also that the alternative command, KSc, is only valid when the remote  
language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
AT Input Attenuation  
AT  
Input Attenuation  
Syntax  
8560 Series:  
;
SP  
SP  
number  
AT  
DB  
LF  
UP  
DN  
CR  
SP  
,
AUTO  
MAN  
OA  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
S
P
number  
;
AT  
DB  
S
P
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Table 4-2  
Item  
Description/Default  
Range  
Number  
Any real number or  
integer. If the value you  
enter is not a valid value  
for the analyzer you are  
using, it switches  
0 to 70 dB specified absolutely  
and  
1
10 to 70 dB in 10 dB steps  
automatically to the  
closest valid setting.  
Default units are dB.  
1. The range is limited to 0 to 60 dB if 8564E/EC or 8565E/EC is selected.  
Preset State: 10 dB  
Step Increment: 10 dB  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
AT Input Attenuation  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Specifies the RF input attenuation.  
Although the attenuation level in the X-series of analyzers can be specified using absolute values, you  
can never set attenuation below 10 dB using the DOWN steps. This is a safety feature to prevent  
inadvertent setting of attenuation to a level that could damage the analyzer.  
NOTE  
In PXA/MXA, the auto attenuation range is 6-70 dB and in EXA, it is 6-60 dB.  
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the signal analyzer.  
CAUTION  
NOTE  
You cannot step down below 10 dB. To set levels below 10 dB, you must specify  
the attenuation absolutely. For example, to set attenuation to 0 dB, you must use  
the command AT 0DB.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
AUNITS Absolute Amplitude Units  
AUNITS  
Absolute Amplitude Units  
Syntax  
8560 series  
SP  
;
AUNITS  
AUTO  
MAN  
DBM  
DBMV  
DBUV  
V
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
W
DM  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
SP  
;
AUNITS  
DBM  
DBMV  
DBUV  
V
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Specifies the amplitude readout units for the reference level, the marker, and the display line.  
NOTE  
If your selected remote language is any of the 8560 Series analyzers, If the  
AUNITS setting is AUTO, then a change from log scale (LG) to linear scale (LN)  
automatically changes the AUNITS setting. For all other settings, no change to  
AUNITS occurs, even when the scale is changed.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
AUNITS Absolute Amplitude Units  
NOTE  
The functions of the command AUNITS are identical to the commands KSA  
these four alternative commands, KSA, KSB, KSC, and KSD are only valid when  
the remote language is either HP8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, or HP8568B.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
AUTOCPL Auto Coupled  
AUTOCPL  
Auto Coupled  
Syntax  
;
AUTOCPL  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Sets video bandwidth, resolution bandwidth, input attenuation, sweep time and center frequency  
step-size to coupled mode.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
AXB Exchange Trace A and Trace B  
AXB  
Exchange Trace A and Trace B  
Syntax  
;
AXB  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
This command exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command AXB are identical to the EX command (page 155)  
and to the XCH TRA,TRB command (page 354).  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
B1 [one] Clear Write for Trace B  
B1 [one]  
Clear Write for Trace B  
Syntax  
;
B1  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The B1 command sets Trace B to clear write. That is, it continuously displays any signal present at the  
analyzer input. The B1 command initially clears Trace B, setting all elements to zero. The sweep trigger  
then signals the start of the sweep, and Trace B is continually updated as the sweep progresses.  
Subsequent sweeps send new amplitude information to the display addresses.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command B1 are identical to the CLRW TRB command  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
B2 [two] Maximum Hold for Trace B  
B2 [two]  
Maximum Hold for Trace B  
Syntax  
;
B2  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The B2 command updates each trace element with the maximum level detected while the trace is active.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command B2 are identical to the MXMH TRB command  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
B3 [three] View Mode for Trace B  
B3 [three]  
View Mode for Trace B  
Syntax  
;
B3  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The B3 command displays Trace B and then stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B does  
not get updated.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command B3 are identical to the VIEW TRB command  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
B4 [four] Blank Trace B  
B4 [four]  
Blank Trace B  
Syntax  
;
B4  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The B4 command blanks Trace B and stops the sweep if no other traces are active. Trace B is not  
updated.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command B4 are identical to the BLANK TRB command  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
BL Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B  
BL  
Trace B minus Display Line to Trace B  
Syntax  
;
BL  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The BL command subtracts the display line from Trace B and sends the results to Trace B.  
The command BL is calculated differently depending on the language being used; for the 8560 Series the  
calculation is performed in units of dBm.  
8560 Series  
8566A  
The calculation is performed in units of dBm.  
The calculation is performed in display units.  
The calculation is performed in display units.  
The calculation is performed in display units.  
The calculation is performed in display units.  
8566B  
8568A  
8568B  
NOTE  
The functions of the command BL are identical to the BML command (page 116).  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
BLANK Blank Trace  
BLANK  
Blank Trace  
Syntax  
8560 Series:  
SP  
;
BLANK  
TRA  
TRB  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
S
P
;
BLANK  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Blanks Trace 1 or trace 2 and stops taking new data into the specified trace. TRA corresponds to Trace 1  
and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.  
For information on the trace settings of the X-series analyzers, see Table 4-4, “Legacy Products  
NOTE  
The functions of the command BLANK are identical to A4 (page 82), B4  
(page 113) or KSJ, and KSk command (page 200) command.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
BML Trace B Minus Display Line  
BML  
Trace B Minus Display Line  
Syntax  
;
BML  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The BML command subtracts the display line from trace B (point by point), and sends the difference to  
trace B. Trace B corresponds to Trace 2.  
The command BML is calculated differently depending on the language being used; for the 8560 Series  
the calculation uses units of dBm.  
For the 8566A, HP8566B, HP8568A, HP8568B - the BML command uses display units.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command BML are identical to the BL command (page 114).  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
BTC Transfer Trace B to Trace C  
BTC  
Transfer Trace B to Trace C  
Syntax  
;
BTC  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The BTC command transfers Trace B data to Trace C  
NOTE  
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be  
updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the analyzer  
are reflected in the data transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must follow the  
four step process below.  
Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)  
Select the desired analyzer settings  
Take one complete sweep  
Transfer the data  
NOTE  
The functions of the command BTC are identical to the KSl command (page 202).  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
BXC Exchange Trace B and Trace C  
BXC  
Exchange Trace B and Trace C  
Syntax  
;
BXC  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The BXC command exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.  
NOTE  
Trace C must not be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be  
updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the analyzer  
are reflected in the data exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you must follow  
the four step process below.  
Select single sweep mode (S2 or SNGLS command)  
Select the desired analyzer settings  
Take one complete sweep  
Exchange the data  
NOTE  
The functions of the command BXC are identical to the KSi command (page 197)  
and to the XCH TRB,TRC command (page 354).  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
C1 [one] Set A Minus B Mode Off  
C1 [one]  
Set A Minus B Mode Off  
Syntax  
C1  
;
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The C1 command turns the A Minus B mode off. That is, it switches off the functionality that was  
switched on by the C2 command (page 120) or by the AMB ON command (page 100).  
NOTE  
The functions of the command C1 are identical to the AMB OFF command  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
C2 [two] A Minus B Into A  
C2 [two]  
A Minus B Into A  
Syntax  
;
C2  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The C2 command subtracts the points in Trace B from the corresponding points in Trace A, and sends  
the results to Trace A. Thus, if your input signal remains unchanged, C2 can restore the original trace  
after an APB command (page 103) or a KSc (page 188) command has been executed.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command C2 are identical to the AMB ON command  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
CA Couple Attenuation  
CA  
Couple Attenuation  
Syntax  
;
CA  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
During normal operation, the analyzer’s input attenuation is coupled to the reference level. This coupling  
keeps the mixer input at a level such that a continuous wave signal displayed at the reference level is at  
or below -10 dBm (or the value specified in the ML command.)  
The CA command sets the threshold to -10 dBm (or to the value specified by the ML command  
(page 267) or the KS, command (page 179)). The counterpart to the CA command is the AT command  
(page 104), which allows levels less than the threshold value at the mixer input.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
CARROFF Carrier Off Power  
CARROFF  
Carrier Off Power  
Syntax  
SP  
,
;
CARROFF  
TRA  
TRB  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Measures the average and peak power of the carrier during the portion of time when the power is off  
(when it is not within 20 dB of its peak level). The powers are combined to provide a calculation of the  
leakage power.  
The measurement needs to be in zero span for the measurement to run.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
CARRON Carrier On Power  
CARRON  
Carrier On Power  
Syntax  
SP  
,
;
CARRON  
TRA  
TRB  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Measures the average power of the carrier during the portion of time when it is on and within 20 dB of its  
peak level.  
The measurement needs to be in zero span for the measurement to run.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
CF Center Frequency  
CF  
Center Frequency  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
CF  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
MZ  
GZ  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Table 4-3  
Item  
Description/Default  
Range  
REAL  
Any real or integer number.  
Default unit is HZ.  
Frequency range of the analyzer  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The CF command specifies the value of the center frequency.  
The step size depends on whether the frequency has been coupled to the span width using the CS  
command (page 135). When coupled, the step size is 10% of the span, or one major graticule division;  
when uncoupled, the step size is determined by the SS command (page 317).  
NOTE  
Although the analyzer allows entry of frequencies not in the specified frequency  
range, using frequencies outside the frequency span of the analyzer is not  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
CF Center Frequency  
recommended and is not warranted to meet specifications.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
CHANNEL Channel Selection  
CHANNEL  
Channel Selection  
Syntax  
SP  
;
CHANNEL  
UP  
DN  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Increments or decrements the analyzer center frequency by one channel spacing.  
NOTE  
The channel spacing value is set using the ACPSP command (page 96).  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
CHANPWR Channel Power  
CHANPWR  
Channel Power  
Syntax  
SP  
,
real  
,
;
CHANPWR  
TRA  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
?
TRB  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
MZ  
GZ  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Measures the power within the specified channel bandwidth.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
CHPWRBW Channel Power Bandwidth  
CHPWRBW  
Channel Power Bandwidth  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
CHPWRBW  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
MZ  
GZ  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Queries or sets the current value of the channel power bandwidth. Channel power can be measured with  
the CHANPWR command (page 127).  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
CLRAVG Clear Average  
CLRAVG  
Clear Average  
Syntax  
;
CLRAVG  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The CLRAVG command restarts the VAVG command by resetting the number of averaged sweeps to  
one. The video averaging routine resets the number of sweeps, but does not stop video averaging. Use  
"VAVG OFF;" to stop video averaging.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
CLRW Clear Write  
CLRW  
Clear Write  
Syntax  
SP  
;
CLRW  
TRA  
TRB  
Preset State: CLRW TRA  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Clears the specified trace and enables trace data acquisition. The CLRW command places the indicated  
trace in clear-write mode. Data acquisition begins at the next sweep. (See the TS command (page 344)  
for more information about data acquisition.)  
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command CLRW are identical to the A1 command (page 79)  
and B1 command (page 110).  
On the 8560 series, 8566A/B, and 8568A/B analyzers the trace settings are set by the trace mode  
parameters, CLRW, VIEW, BLANK, MINH and MAXH and the averaging settings by VAVG. On the  
X-series the same settings are set in the Trace/Detector and View/Blank parameters. The following table  
describes what the N9061A application sets in the X-series box when the legacy commands for trace  
mode and averaging are sent.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
CLRW Clear Write  
Table 4-4  
Legacy Products command mapping to X-series for trace/detector settings  
X-series  
Legacy Products  
Trace  
Averaging Detector Trace/Detector  
View/Blank Detector  
commands (VAVG)  
(DET)  
Trace Type  
CLRW  
CLRW  
MXMH  
MXMH  
MINH  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
On  
Normal  
Sample  
Peak  
ClearWrite  
On  
Last set  
Sample  
Peak  
Trace Average  
Max Hold  
On  
On  
Sample  
Trace Average  
On  
Peak  
NegPeak Min Hold  
On  
NegPeak  
NegPeak  
No change  
Sample  
No change  
Sample  
MINH  
Sample  
Normal  
Sample  
Normal  
Sample  
Trace Average  
On  
VIEW  
No change  
View  
View  
Blank  
Blank  
VIEW  
Trace Average  
No change  
BLANK  
BLANK  
Trace Average  
For example if the 8560 series sends CLRW and the averaging is set to ON, the 8560 series analyzer  
detector is automatically set to Sample. The N9061A application sets the X-series instrument trace type  
to Trace Average, View/Blank to On and the Detector to Sample.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Commands  
CONTS Continuous Sweep  
CONTS  
Continuous Sweep  
Syntax  
;
CONTS  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Preset State: CONTS  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The CONTS command sets the analyzer to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the  
analyzer takes its next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the trigger conditions  
are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data entries made over the remote interface or from  
the front panel.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command CONTS are identical to the S1 command  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
COUPLE Input Coupling  
COUPLE  
Input Coupling  
Syntax  
SP  
;
COUPLE  
AC  
DC  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The COUPLE command selects AC or DC coupling.  
NOTE  
When using the X-series analyzers, you must use DC coupling to see calibrated  
frequencies of less than 20 MHz. Signals of less than 20 MHz are not calibrated  
when using AC coupling on these analyzers.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
CR Couple Resolution Bandwidth  
CR  
Couple Resolution Bandwidth  
Syntax  
;
CR  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The CR command couples the resolution bandwidth to the span.  
The counterpart to the CR command is the RB command (page 295) which breaks the coupling. Use the  
CR command to re-establish coupling after executing an RB command.  
NOTE  
CR uses the legacy instrument settings for resolution bandwidth only if Mode  
Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Programming Commands  
CS Couple Frequency Step Size  
CS  
Couple Frequency Step Size  
Syntax  
;
CS  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The CS command couples the center frequency step size to the span width so that the step size equals  
10% of the span width, or one major graticule division.  
The counterpart to the CS command is the SS command (page 317) which breaks the coupling. Use the  
CS command to re-establish coupling after an SS command has been executed.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
CT Couple Sweep Time  
CT  
Couple Sweep Time  
Syntax  
;
CT  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The CT command couples the sweep time to the span, resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth.  
The counterpart to the CT command is the ST command (page 318) which breaks the coupling. Use the  
CT command to re-establish coupling after an ST command has been executed.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
CV Couple Video Bandwidth  
CV  
Couple Video Bandwidth  
Syntax  
;
CV  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The CV command couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.  
The counterpart to the CV command is the VB command (page 347) which breaks the coupling. Use the  
CV command to re-establish coupling after executing a VB command.  
NOTE  
CV uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth only if Mode  
Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
DA Display Address  
DA  
Display Address  
Syntax  
SP  
number  
;
DA  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The DA command returns the contents of the given display address to the controller  
NOTE  
This command only supports the use of the DA 1, DA 1025, and DA 3073; these  
display addresses contain the trace data and are equivalent to using the commands  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
DELMKBW Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker  
DELMKBW  
Occupied Power Bandwidth Within Delta Marker  
Syntax  
;
SP  
,
real  
,
DELMKBW  
TRA  
TRB  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Calculates the OBW with respect to the power between the displayed delta markers. The power between  
the displayed markers is then used as the reference, rather than using the total power in the frequency  
span as is done in the PWRBW (page 290) command.  
If the DELMKBW command is used when no marker is active, a delta marker is activated at the center  
frequency, and the returned bandwidth is 0. If the active marker is a normal marker when the  
DELMKBW command is used, the marker type is changed to delta, and the returned bandwidth is 0.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
DET Detection Mode  
DET  
Detection Mode  
Syntax  
SP  
;
DET  
POS  
SMP  
LF  
NEG  
NRM  
CR  
SP  
,
?
Preset State: DET NRM  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The DET command selects the type of analyzer detection (positive-peak, negative peak, sample, normal,  
and so on).  
POS  
enables positive-peak detection, which displays the maximum video signal detected  
over a number of instantaneous samples for a particular frequency.  
SMP  
enables sample detection, which uses the instantaneous video signal value. Video  
averaging and noise-level markers, when activated, activate sample detection  
automatically.  
NEG  
enables negative peak detection.  
NRM  
enables the ‘rosenfell’ detection algorithm that selectively chooses between positive  
and negative values.  
NOTE  
The functions of the DET command are identical to the KSa command (page 184),  
the KSb command (page 186), the KSd command (page 190), and the KSe  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
DL Display Line  
DL  
Display Line  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
number  
;
DL  
DB  
DBM  
DBMV  
DBUV  
MV  
LF  
SP  
UP  
DN  
CR  
SP  
,
OFF  
ON  
UV  
V
MW  
UW  
W
DM  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
number  
;
DL  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
DL Display Line  
Table 4-5  
Item  
Description/Default  
Range  
NUMBER  
Any real or integer number.  
Default units are dBm.  
Dependent on the reference level  
Preset State: DL OFF  
Step Increment: 1 major graticule division  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Defines the level of the display line and displays it on the analyzer screen.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
DLE Display Line Enable  
DLE  
Display Line Enable  
Syntax  
SP  
;
DLE  
ON  
OFF  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Enables or disables the display line.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
DLYSWP Delay Sweep  
DLYSWP  
Delay Sweep  
Syntax  
SP  
number  
DLYSWP  
;
US  
MS  
SC  
S
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
SP  
SP  
ON  
OFF  
1
0
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Delays the start of the sweep until the specified time after the trigger event has elapsed.  
NOTE  
A query response of 0 indicates that DLYSWP is switched off.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
DONE Done  
DONE  
Done  
Syntax  
;
DONE  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Allows you to determine when the analyzer has parsed a list of analyzer commands and has executed all  
commands prior to and including DONE. The DONE command returns a value of “1” when all  
commands in a command string or command list have been completed.  
If a take sweep (TS command (page 344)) precedes the command list, the TS command acts as a  
synchronizing function since the command list execution begins after the sweep has been completed.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
DR Display Read  
DR  
Display Read  
Syntax  
;
DR  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The DR command sends the contents of the current display address to the controller.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
E1[one] Peak Marker  
E1[one]  
Peak Marker  
Syntax  
;
E1  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The E1 command positions the marker at the signal peak.  
NOTE  
The functions of the E1 command are identical to MKPK (no secondary keyword)  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
E2 [two] Marker to Center Frequency  
E2 [two]  
Marker to Center Frequency  
Syntax  
;
E2  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The E2 command positions the marker on the screen at the center frequency position.  
NOTE  
Unlike MKCF (page 244), which moves the CF to the current position of the active  
marker, the function of E2 centers the active marker to the center frequency on the  
analyzer screen.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
E3 [three] Delta Marker Step Size  
E3 [three]  
Delta Marker Step Size  
Syntax  
;
E3  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The E3 command establishes the center frequency step size as being the frequency difference between  
the delta marker and the active marker.  
NOTE  
The functions of the E3 command are identical to the MKSS command (page 262).  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
E4 [four] Marker to Reference Level  
E4 [four]  
Marker to Reference Level  
Syntax  
;
E4  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The E4 command moves the active marker to the reference level.  
NOTE  
Unlike MKRL (page 260), which moves to the level of the delta Marker when in  
delta Maker mode.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
EDITDONE Edit Done  
EDITDONE  
Edit Done  
Syntax  
;
EDITDONE  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
This command is used at the completion of limit-line editing within the EDITLIML command.  
During the limit line commands beginning with EDITLIML and ending with EDITDONE, you can enter  
the limit line data.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ERR Error  
ERR  
Error  
Syntax  
;
ERR  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The ERR command returns a list of three-digit error codes if errors are present. A code of “0” means that  
there are no errors present. Executing ERR? clears all GPIB errors.  
If a command is a valid legacy command but not accepted by the N9061A application, no error message  
is generated and the response to ERR? is 0. However, if logging is enabled, the N9061A application  
command log registers a “Cmd not Supported” error.  
If a command is not a valid legacy command, a command error is generated; CMD ERR is displayed on  
the front panel and the response to ERR? is 112. If logging is enabled then Cmd Error is written to the  
command error log.  
Table 4-6  
Error Code  
Description  
CMD ERR  
112  
Error codes are provided in RLC mode for some X-series errors such as external reference, hardware and  
alignment errors. The X-series error codes are translated to 8560 series error codes so that an error query  
returns the legacy instrument error code. To review the error via the front panel, select the System  
hardkey and then select Show > Errors. The following table shows the X-series error codes and the  
translated value.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ERR Error  
Table 4-7  
X-series  
error code  
Description  
8560 series Description  
error code  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
TG Alignment Failure  
RF Alignment Failure  
IF Alignment Failure  
LO Alignment Failure  
ADC Alignment Failure  
758  
758  
758  
758  
758  
758  
SYSTEM: Unknown system error  
SYSTEM: Unknown system error  
SYSTEM: Unknown system error  
SYSTEM: Unknown system error  
SYSTEM: Unknown system error  
SYSTEM: Unknown system error  
FM Demod Alignment  
Failure  
54  
Extended Align Failure  
Sum  
758  
758  
758  
SYSTEM: Unknown system error  
SYSTEM: Unknown system error  
SYSTEM: Unknown system error  
71  
Characterize Preselector  
Failure  
-200.3310  
Execution Error;  
Preselector Centering  
failed  
503  
505  
Frequency Reference  
Unlocked  
336  
336  
10 MHz Ref Cal oscillator failed to lock  
when going to internal 10 MHz  
reference.  
2nd LO Unlocked  
10 MHz Ref Cal oscillator failed to lock  
when going to internal 10 MHz  
reference.  
509  
513  
515  
LO Unlocked  
300  
450  
336  
YTO UNL: YTO (1st LO) phase-locked  
loop (PLL) is unlocked.  
IF Synthesizer Unlocked  
IF SYSTM: IF hardware failure. Check  
other error messages.  
Calibration Oscillator  
Unlocked  
10 MHz Ref: Cal oscillator failed to lock  
when going to internal 10 MHz  
reference  
521  
External Ref missing or  
out of range  
905,333  
EXT REF: Unable to lock cal oscillator  
when set to external reference. Check  
that the external reference is within  
tolerance.  
600 UNLK: 600 MHz reference  
oscillator PLL is unlocked  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
ET Elapsed Time  
ET  
Elapsed Time  
Syntax  
;
ET  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The ET command returns to the controller the elapsed time (in hours) of analyzer operation.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
EX Exchange Trace A and Trace B  
EX  
Exchange Trace A and Trace B  
Syntax  
;
EX  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
This command exchanges Trace A and Trace B, point by point.  
NOTE  
The functions of the EX command are identical to the AXB command  
(page 109)and to the XCH TRA,TRB command (page 354).  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
FA Start Frequency  
FA  
Start Frequency  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
FA  
HZ  
KHZ  
LF  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
CR  
SP  
,
MZ  
GZ  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Table 4-8  
Item  
Description/Default  
Range  
REAL  
Any real or integer number.  
Default unit is Hz.  
Frequency range of the analyzer  
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The FA command specifies the start frequency value. The start frequency is equal to the center  
frequency minus (the span divided by two) (FA = CF SP/2). Changing the start frequency changes the  
center frequency and span.  
NOTE  
The OA parameter only returns the current value to the controller. It does not set  
the active function to the start frequency.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
FB Stop Frequency  
FB  
Stop Frequency  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
FB  
HZ  
KHZ  
LF  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
CR  
SP  
,
MZ  
GZ  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Table 4-9  
Item  
Description/Default  
Range  
Frequency range of the analyzer  
REAL  
Any real or integer number.  
Default unit is Hz.  
Step Increment: Frequency span divided by 10  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The FB command specifies the stop frequency value. The stop frequency is equal to the center frequency  
plus the span divided by two (FB = CF + SP/2). Changing the stop frequency changes the center  
frequency and span.  
NOTE  
The OA parameter only returns the current value to the controller. It does not set  
the active function to the stop frequency.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
FDSP Frequency Display Off  
FDSP  
Frequency Display Off  
Syntax  
SP  
;
FDSP  
OFF  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The FDSP command turns the frequency annotation OFF.  
NOTE  
It is not possible enable or disable the frequency annotation alone, leaving other  
annotation unaffected. Thus, the FDSP command behaves in the same way as  
ANNOT (page 102) If the FDSP command has been used to disable the frequency  
annotation, sending the ANNOT ON command does not re-enable the display  
annotation. The display annotation is only displayed by sending the IP (page 178)  
command.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
FOFFSET Frequency Offset  
FOFFSET  
Frequency Offset  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
FOFFSET  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
MZ  
GZ  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Table 4-10  
Item  
Description/Default  
Range  
REAL  
Any real or integer number.  
Default unit is Hz.  
Preset State: 0 Hz  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The FOFFSET command selects a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute frequency  
readouts (for example, center frequency). Relative values such as span and marker delta are not offset.  
When an offset is in effect, it is displayed beneath the bottom graticule line on the analyzer screen.  
Execute “FOFFSET 0;” or “IP;” to turn off the offset.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
FOFFSET Frequency Offset  
NOTE  
The functions of the FOFFSET command are identical to the KSV command  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
FPKA Fast Preselector Peak  
FPKA  
Fast Preselector Peak  
Syntax  
;
FPKA  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B  
Description  
The FPKA command automatically adjusts the preselector frequency to yield the greatest signal level at  
the active marker. The FPKA command peaks the preselector faster than the preselector-peak command,  
PP Although this command can be executed in all frequency spans, it performs best when the instrument  
is in zero span. Use the standard preselector peak for all other frequency spans. The FPKA command  
also returns the amplitude value of active marker.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
FREF Frequency Reference  
FREF  
Frequency Reference  
Syntax  
SP  
;
FREF  
INT  
EXT  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The FREF command specifies whether an external source or an internal source is being used.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
FS Full Span  
FS  
Full Span  
Syntax  
;
FS  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
8560 series: The FS command sets the frequency span of the analyzer to full span. Resolution  
bandwidth, video bandwidth, and sweep time are all set to auto-coupled.  
8566A/B, 8568A/B: The FS command does an instrument preset, then sets the low band.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The functions of the FS command are identical to the LF command (page 216).  
Whenever the frequency range of the analyzer you are using does not match the  
remote language’s own range, the span is limited by the capabilities of the  
replacement analyzer. The tables on the following pages list the frequency ranges  
for all the supported remote languages when running on any of Agilent’s X-series  
analyzers.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
FS Full Span  
Table 4-11  
PXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command  
N9030A-503  
N9030A-508  
N9030A-513  
N9030A-526  
Remote  
Language  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range  
8560E/EC  
8561E/EC  
8562E/EC  
8563E/EC  
8564E/EC  
8565E/EC  
8566A  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz  
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz  
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz  
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz  
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
8566B  
8568A  
8568B  
Table 4-12  
MXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command  
N9020A-503  
N9020A-508  
N9020A-513  
N9020A-526  
Remote  
Language  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range  
8560E/EC  
8561E/EC  
8562E/EC  
8563E/EC  
8564E/EC  
8565E/EC  
8566A  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz  
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz  
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz  
0 Hz - 8.4 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz  
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
8566B  
8568A  
8568B  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
FS Full Span  
Table 4-13  
EXA Series - Frequency Ranges Set by the FS Command  
N9010A-503  
N9010A-507  
N9010A-513  
N9010A-526  
Remote  
Language  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range  
Frequency Range  
8560E/EC  
8561E/EC  
8562E/EC  
8563E/EC  
8564E/EC  
8565E/EC  
8566A  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 3.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 7.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.6 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.9 GHz  
0 Hz - 6.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 13.2 GHz  
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 27.0 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 2.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
0 Hz - 1.5 GHz  
8566B  
8568A  
8568B  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
GATE Gate  
GATE  
Gate  
Syntax  
SP  
;
GATE  
ON  
OFF  
LF  
SP  
1
0
CR  
SP  
,
?
Preset State: GATE OFF  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Turns the time-gating function on or off. When the time-gating function is turned on, the analyzer  
activates the time gate circuitry according to the parameters controlled by gate length (GL), gate delay  
(GD) and the gate trigger input.  
The query command GATE? returns different responses depending on the language being used.  
8560 Series  
Query response is either 1 or 0, indicating ON or OFF state.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
GATECTL Gate Control  
GATECTL  
Gate Control  
Syntax  
;
SP  
GATECTL  
EDGE  
LEVEL  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Preset State: GATECTL EDGE  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Selects between the edge and level mode for time gate function. In the edge mode, a specified trigger  
edge starts the gate delay timer that in turn starts the gate length timer. In the level mode, the gate follows  
the trigger input level. The gate delay timer (GD) and the gate time length (GL) are operational in the  
edge mode, but not in the level mode.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
GD Gate Delay  
GD  
Gate Delay  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
GD  
US  
MS  
LF  
SC  
S
CR  
SP  
,
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Preset State: 3 μs  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Sets the delay time from when the gate trigger occurs to when the gate is turned on. GD only applies if  
GATECTL is set to EDGE.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
GL Gate Length  
GL  
Gate Length  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
GL  
US  
MS  
LF  
SC  
S
CR  
SP  
,
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Preset State: 1 μs  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Sets the length of time the time gate is turned on. GL only applies if GATECTL is set to EDGE.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
GP Gate Polarity  
GP  
Gate Polarity  
Syntax  
SP  
;
GP  
NEG  
POS  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Preset State: GP POS  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Sets the polarity (positive or negative) for the gate trigger. If the gate control (GATECTL) is in the edge  
mode, the gate delay timer can be triggered on either a positive or negative edge of the trigger input. If  
the gate control is in level mode and positive is selected, the gate is on when the trigger input is high. If  
the gate control is in level mode and negative is selected, the gate is on when the trigger is low.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
GRAT Graticule  
GRAT  
Graticule  
Syntax  
SP  
;
GRAT  
ON  
OFF  
LF  
SP  
1
0
CR  
SP  
,
?
Preset State: GRAT ON  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Turns the graticule on or off.  
NOTE  
The functions of the GRAT command are identical to the KSm command  
The query command GRAT? returns different responses depending on the language being used.  
8560 Series  
8566A  
For Phoenix2 cut sentence above and paste here  
Query response is either ON or OFF.  
Query response is either ON or OFF.  
Query response is either ON or OFF.  
Query response is either ON or OFF.  
8566B  
8568A  
8568B  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
HD Hold Data Entry  
HD  
Hold Data Entry  
Syntax  
;
HD  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Disables data entry via the analyzer numeric keypad, knob, or step keys. The active function readout is  
blanked, and any active function is deactivated.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
I1 [one] Set RF Coupling to DC  
I1 [one]  
Set RF Coupling to DC  
Syntax  
;
I1  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8568A/B  
Description  
The I1 [one] command sets the RF coupling to DC.  
The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series analyzers for both DC and AC  
coupling.  
Table 4-14  
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
Min. Freq.  
Max. Freq.  
Min. Freq.  
Max. Freq.  
8568A/B  
100 Hz  
1.5 GHz  
100 kHz  
1.5 GHz  
Table 4-15  
EXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
(N9010A)  
Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq.  
Option 503  
Option 507  
Option 513  
9 kHz  
9 kHz  
9 kHz  
3.6 GHz  
7.0 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
3.6 GHz  
7.0 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
I1 [one] Set RF Coupling to DC  
Table 4-15  
EXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
(N9010A)  
Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq.  
Option 526  
9 kHz  
26.5 GHz  
10 MHz  
26.5 GHz  
Table 4-16  
MXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
(N9020A)  
Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq.  
Option 503  
Option 508  
Option 513  
Option 526  
20 Hz  
20 Hz  
20 Hz  
20 Hz  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
Table 4-17  
PXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
(N9030A)  
Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq.  
Option 503  
Option 508  
Option 513  
Option 526  
3 Hz  
3 Hz  
3 Hz  
3 Hz  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
NOTE  
The X-Series analyzers only have a single RF input port.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
I2 [two] Set RF Coupling to AC  
I2 [two]  
Set RF Coupling to AC  
Syntax  
;
I2  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8568A/B  
Description  
The I2 [two] command sets the RF coupling to AC.  
The tables below list the frequency specifications for all X-Series analyzers for both DC and AC  
coupling.  
Table 4-18  
8568A/B Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
Min. Freq.  
Max. Freq.  
Min. Freq.  
Max. Freq.  
8568A/B  
100 Hz  
1.5 GHz  
100 kHz  
1.5 GHz  
Table 4-19  
EXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
(N9010A)  
Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq.  
Option 503  
Option 507  
Option 513  
9 kHz  
9 kHz  
9 kHz  
3.6 GHz  
7.0 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
3.6 GHz  
7.0 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
I2 [two] Set RF Coupling to AC  
Table 4-19  
EXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
(N9010A)  
Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq.  
Option 526  
9 kHz  
26.5 GHz  
10 MHz  
26.5 GHz  
Table 4-20  
MXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
(N9020A)  
Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq.  
Option 503  
Option 508  
Option 513  
Option 526  
20 Hz  
20 Hz  
20 Hz  
20 Hz  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
Table 4-21  
PXA Series Analyzer Frequency Coupling Specifications  
DC Coupled Range  
AC Coupled Range  
Analyzer Model  
(N9030A)  
Min. Freq. Max. Freq. Min. Freq. Max. Freq.  
Option 503  
Option 508  
Option 513  
Option 526  
3 Hz  
3 Hz  
3 Hz  
3 Hz  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
10 MHz  
3.6 GHz  
8.4 GHz  
13.6 GHz  
26.5 GHz  
NOTE  
The X-Series analyzers only have a single RF input port.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
ID Identify  
ID  
Identify  
Syntax  
;
ID  
?
SP  
LF  
OA  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The ID command returns the current remote language to the controller (for example, “HP8563E”).  
The response value is determined by your remote language selection. This is configured via the  
front-panel menu selection in Mode Setup when in RLC mode. The remote language selection can also  
be set using the SCPI command SYSTem:LANGuage.  
ID? also works when you are not in RLC mode. In this case the instrument model number is returned.  
The string that is returned is identical to the second field of text that is returned from the *IDN?  
command.  
For more information see:  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
IP Instrument Preset  
IP  
Instrument Preset  
Syntax  
;
IP  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Performs an instrument preset, setting the analyzer back to its factory settings. IP does not affect the  
contents of any data or trace registers or stored preselector data. IP does not clear the input or output data  
buffers on the 8560-series analyzers, but does clear them on the 8566A/B, 8568A/B.  
Instrument preset automatically occurs when you turn on the analyzer. IP is a good starting point for  
many measurement processes. When IP is executed remotely, the analyzer does not necessarily execute a  
complete sweep, however. You should execute a take sweep (TS) to ensure that the trace data is valid  
after an IP.  
The N9061A application executes this command after any language switch on the X-Series analyzer.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The functions of the IP command are identical to the KST command (page 210).  
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing an IP command does not reset  
this value. This is to protect the analyzer.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KS, Mixer Level  
KS,  
Mixer Level  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
KS,  
DM  
MV  
UV  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KS, command specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that  
is equal to or below the reference level.  
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting. When KS, is  
activated, the effective mixer level can be set from -10 dBm to -70 dBm in 10 dB steps.  
As the reference level is changed, the coupled input attenuator automatically changes to limit the  
maximum signal at the mixer input to your specified setting for signals less than or equal to the reference  
level.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
If the external amplifier gain has been set, executing an IP command will not reset  
this value. This is to protect the analyzer.  
The functions of the KS, command are identical to the ML command (page 267).  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KS= 8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking 8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution  
KS=  
8566A/B: Automatic Preselector Tracking  
8568A/B: Marker Counter Resolution  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
KS=  
HZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
8566A/B: Use the KS= command to reinstate automatic preselector tracking after KS/ has been  
executed. Normally, the center of the preselector filter automatically tracks signal responses in the four  
frequency bands of the 2 to 22 GHz range.  
The KS/ command allows manual adjustment of the preselector tracking and the X-Series analyzers can  
swallow this command with no action.  
8568A/B: Specifies the resolution of the marker frequency counter.  
NOTE  
For 8568A/B, the functions of the KS= command are identical to the MKFCR  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KS( Lock Registers  
KS(  
Lock Registers  
Syntax  
;
KS(  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KS( command secures the contents of registers one through six. When the registers are secured, the  
SV and SAVE commands cannot save more instrument states in the registers, but instead write "SAVE  
LOCK" on the analyzer display. To save an instrument state in a locked register, first execute KS) to  
unlock the registers.  
The recall function of the analyzer is not affected by this function.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
KS) Unlock Registers  
KS)  
Unlock Registers  
Syntax  
;
KS)  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KS) command unlocks the registers where instrument states are stored with SV and SAVE  
commands.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
KSA Amplitude in dBm  
KSA  
Amplitude in dBm  
Syntax  
;
KSA  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSA command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to  
dBm units.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSA command are identical to the AUNITS DBM command  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSa Normal Detection  
KSa  
Normal Detection  
Syntax  
;
KSa  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSa command selects normal input detection. That is, it enables the ‘rosenfell’ detection algorithm  
that selectively chooses between positive and negative values.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSa command are identical to the DET NRM command  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSB Amplitude in dBmV  
KSB  
Amplitude in dBmV  
Syntax  
;
KSB  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSB command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to  
dBmV units.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSB command are identical to the AUNITS DBMV  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSb Positive Peak Detection  
KSb  
Positive Peak Detection  
Syntax  
;
KSb  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSb command enables positive peak input detection for displaying trace information. Trace  
elements are only updated when the detected signal level is greater than the previous signal level.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSb command are identical to the DET POS command  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSC Amplitude in dBuV  
KSC  
Amplitude in dBuV  
Syntax  
;
KSC  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSC command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to  
dBuV units.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSC command are identical to the AUNITS DBUV command  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSc A Plus B to A  
KSc  
A Plus B to A  
Syntax  
;
KSc  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSc command does a point-by-point addition of Trace A and Trace B, and sends the results to Trace  
A. Thus, if your input signal remains unchanged, KSc can restore the original trace after an AMB or a C2  
command has been executed.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSc are identical to the APB command (page 103).  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSD Amplitude in Volts  
KSD  
Amplitude in Volts  
Syntax  
;
KSD  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSD command sets the amplitude readout (reference level, marker, display line and threshold) to  
voltage units.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSD command are identical to the AUNITS V command  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSd Negative Peak Detection  
KSd  
Negative Peak Detection  
Syntax  
;
KSd  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSd command selects negative-peak input detection for displaying trace information. Each trace  
element is updated with the minimum value detected during the sweep.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSd are identical to the DET NEG command  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSE Title Mode  
KSE  
Title Mode  
Syntax  
char  
real  
terminator  
;
KSE  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSE command activates the title mode, writing a message to the top line of the display.  
NOTE  
The only characters that the N9061A application accepts as a terminator are the  
‘@’ character and the carriage return.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
KSe Sample Detection  
KSe  
Sample Detection  
Syntax  
;
KSe  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSe command selects sample input detection for displaying trace information.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSe are identical to the DET SMP command  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSG Video Averaging On  
KSG  
Video Averaging On  
Syntax  
average  
length  
SP  
;
KSG  
ON  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSG command enables video averaging. The averaged trace is displayed in Trace A.  
If video averaging is off when either KSG? or KSG OA is sent to the instrument, video averaging is  
turned on and the current average count is returned to the controller.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSG command are identical to the VAVG ON command  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSg Display Off  
KSg  
Display Off  
Syntax  
;
KSg  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSg command turns the analyzer’s display Off.  
NOTE  
On the legacy spectrum analyzers, this command turned the CRT beam power off  
to avoid unnecessary wear on the CRT. Although this command is supported,  
displays used on the X-Series analyzers have a much longer life than the CRTs  
used in the legacy spectrum analyzers.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
KSH Video Averaging Off  
KSH  
Video Averaging Off  
Syntax  
;
KSH  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSH command switches video averaging Off.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSH command are identical to the VAVG OFF command  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSh Display On  
KSh  
Display On  
Syntax  
;
KSh  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSh command turns the analyzer’s display On.  
NOTE  
On the early models of spectrum analyzers, CRT beam power was often switched  
Off to prevent wear of the CRT. This command (KSh) was used to turn the CRT  
beam power on again. Although this command is supported, displays used on the  
X-Series analyzers have a much longer life than the CRTs used in the legacy  
spectrum analyzers.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
KSi Exchange Trace B and Trace C  
KSi  
Exchange Trace B and Trace C  
Syntax  
;
KSi  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSi command exchanges Trace B data with Trace C data.  
NOTE  
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be  
updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the analyzer  
are reflected in the data exchanged between Trace B and Trace C, you must follow  
the four step process below.  
Select single sweep mode (S2 (page 307) or SNGLS command (page 313))  
Select the desired analyzer settings  
Take one complete sweep using the TS command (page 344)  
Exchange the data  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSi are identical to the BXC command (page 118)  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSj View Trace C  
KSj  
View Trace C  
Syntax  
;
KSj  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSj command displays Trace C.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSj are identical to the VIEW TRC command  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSK Marker to Next Peak  
KSK  
Marker to Next Peak  
Syntax  
;
KSK  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
If there is a marker on the screen, the KSK command moves this marker to the next signal peak of lower  
amplitude.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSK command are similar to the MKPK NH command  
(page 255), except that KSK does not take into account the marker peak threshold  
value or the marker peak excursion value. For more details on marker peak  
threshold, see the MKPT command (page 256) and the TH command (page 333).  
For more details on marker peak excursion, see the MKPX command (page 257).  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSk Blank Trace C  
KSk  
Blank Trace C  
Syntax  
;
KSk  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSj command blanks Trace C.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSk are identical to the BLANK TRC command  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSL Marker Noise Off  
KSL  
Marker Noise Off  
Syntax  
;
KSL  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSL command disables the noise density function which displays the RMS noise density at the  
marker. KSL does not blank the marker.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSL command are identical to the MKNOISE OFF command  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
KSl Transfer Trace B to Trace C  
KSl  
Transfer Trace B to Trace C  
Syntax  
;
KSl  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSl command transfers Trace B data to Trace C  
NOTE  
Trace C cannot be an active trace. This means that the data in Trace C cannot be  
updated as the analyzer sweeps. To ensure that the current settings of the analyzer  
are reflected in the data transferred from Trace B to Trace C, you must follow the  
four step process below.  
Select single sweep mode (S2 (page 307) or SNGLS command (page 313))  
Select the desired analyzer settings  
Take one complete sweep using the TS command (page 344)  
Transfer the data  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSl are identical to the BTC command (page 117).  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSM Marker Noise On  
KSM  
Marker Noise On  
Syntax  
;
KSM  
?
OA  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSM command displays the noise density at the marker. The noise density is normalized to a 1Hz  
bandwidth.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSM command are identical to the MKNOISE ON command  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSm Graticule Off  
KSm  
Graticule Off  
Syntax  
;
KSm  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSm command blanks the graticule on the analyzer display.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSm are identical to the GRAT OFF command  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSN Marker Minimum  
KSN  
Marker Minimum  
Syntax  
;
KSN  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSN command moves the marker to the minimum value detected.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSN command are identical to the MKMIN command  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSn Graticule On  
KSn  
Graticule On  
Syntax  
;
KSn  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSn command turns on the graticule on the analyzer display.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSn are identical to the GRAT ON command  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSO Marker Span  
KSO  
Marker Span  
Syntax  
;
KSO  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSO command operates only when the delta marker is On (see MKD (page 245) or M3 (page 229)).  
When the delta marker is on and the KSO command is executed, the left marker specifies the start  
frequency, and the right marker specifies the stop frequency. If the delta marker is off, the command  
does nothing.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its position.  
The functions of the KSO command are identical to the MKSP command  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSo Annotation Off  
KSo  
Annotation Off  
Syntax  
;
KSo  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSo command blanks the annotation on the analyzer display.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSo are identical to the ANNOT OFF command  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSp Annotation On  
KSp  
Annotation On  
Syntax  
;
KSp  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSp command activates the annotation on the analyzer display.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSp are identical to the ANNOT ON command  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KST Fast Preset  
KST  
Fast Preset  
Syntax  
;
KST  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Performs an instrument preset, setting the analyzer back to its factory settings.  
NOTE  
There is no fast preset for X-Series analyzers. Instead, the Code Compatibility  
software performs an instrument preset (IP) when the KST command is issued.  
The functions of the command KST are therefore identical to the IP command  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSV Frequency Offset  
KSV  
Frequency Offset  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
KSV  
HZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSV command allows you to specify a value that offsets the frequency scale for all absolute  
frequency readouts, for example, center frequency. Relative values, for example, span and delta marker,  
are not offset.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSV command are identical to the FOFFSET command  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
KSx External Trigger  
KSx  
External Trigger  
Syntax  
;
KSx  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSx command activates the normal external trigger mode. When the KSx command is executed, the  
RF input signal is only displayed when the external trigger level exceeds the trigger threshold level.  
NOTE  
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep time is less  
than 20 msec, the display only gets refreshed when a fresh trace has been taken.  
This can cause the displayed trace to flicker.  
In the N9061A application of X-Series analyzers, all traces are displayed  
continuously, so all traces are therefore free of flicker.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSx are identical to the TM EXT command  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
KSy Video Trigger  
KSy  
Video Trigger  
Syntax  
;
KSy  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSy command activates the normal video trigger mode. When the KSy command is executed, the  
RF input signal is only displayed when the video trigger signal, which is internally triggered off the input  
signal, exceeds the trigger threshold level.  
NOTE  
If an 8566A/B or an 8568A/B analyzer is in zero span and the sweep time is less  
than 20 msec, the display only gets refreshed when a fresh trace has been taken.  
This can cause the displayed trace to flicker.  
In the N9061A application of X-Series analyzers, all traces are displayed  
continuously, so all traces are therefore free of flicker.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command KSy are identical to the TM VID command  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
KSZ Reference Level Offset  
KSZ  
Reference Level Offset  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
KSZ  
DM  
MV  
UV  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The KSZ command offsets all amplitude readouts on the display but without affecting the trace. Note the  
8566A/B only supports unit DM.  
Once activated, the KSZ command displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen.  
Entering KSZ 0 or presetting the spectrum analyzer eliminates an amplitude offset.  
NOTE  
The functions of the KSZ command are identical to the ROFFSET command  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
L0 [zero] Display Line Off  
L0 [zero]  
Display Line Off  
Syntax  
;
L0  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The L0 [zero] command disables the display line.  
NOTE  
The functions of the L0 [zero] command are identical to the DLE OFF command  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LF Low Frequency Preset  
LF  
Low Frequency Preset  
Syntax  
;
LF  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B  
Description  
Performs a low frequency preset. That is, it selects a Start Frequency of 0 Hz and a Stop Frequency of  
2.5 GHz, a Reference Level of 0dBm, and sets all coupled functions to automatic.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LG Logarithmic Scale  
LG  
Logarithmic Scale  
Syntax  
SP  
SP  
number  
;
LG  
DB  
DM  
LF  
UP  
DN  
OA  
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Specifies the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) as logarithmic units, without changing the reference  
level. The integer ranges vary between the different remote languages. The following table lists the  
ranges for each remote language.  
Table 4-22  
Integer Range using the  
Remote Language  
LG Command  
8560E/EC  
8561E/EC  
8562E/EC  
8563E/EC  
8564E/EC  
8565E/EC  
8566A  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
8566B  
8568A  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LG Logarithmic Scale  
Table 4-22  
Integer Range using the  
LG Command  
Remote Language  
8568B  
1, 2, 5, and 10  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
LIMF Limit Line Frequency Value  
LIMF  
Limit Line Frequency Value  
Syntax  
SP  
number  
;
LIMF  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
MZ  
GZ  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The LIMF command is used to enter a frequency value for a limit-line segment.  
NOTE  
The response to the query command LIMF? is not supported by N9061A.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LIMIFAIL Limits Failed  
LIMIFAIL  
Limits Failed  
Syntax  
;
LIMIFAIL  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The LIMIFAIL command returns a number between 0 and 3 which specifies whether the active trace  
passed or failed the upper and lower limit line tests. The meanings of the returned numbers are shown  
below.  
Table 4-23  
Results of the LIMIFAIL Command  
Result  
Meaning  
0
1
2
3
The active trace passed both the upper and the lower limit tests.  
The active trace failed the lower limit test.  
The active trace failed the upper limit test.  
The active trace failed both the upper and the lower limit tests.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LIMIPURGE Delete Current Limit Line  
LIMIPURGE  
Delete Current Limit Line  
Syntax  
;
LIMIPURGE  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The LIMIPURGE command deletes the current limit line.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LIMIREL Relative Limit Lines  
LIMIREL  
Relative Limit Lines  
Syntax  
SP  
;
LIMIREL  
ON  
OFF  
SP  
1
0
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LIML Lower-Limit Amplitude  
LIML  
Lower-Limit Amplitude  
Syntax  
SP  
number  
;
LIML  
DB  
DBM  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The LIML command assigns the lower-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LIMTSL Slope Limit Line  
LIMTSL  
Slope Limit Line  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The LIMTSL command makes the selected limit-line segment sloped. Default setting is sloped.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LIMU Upper-Limit Amplitude  
LIMU  
Upper-Limit Amplitude  
Syntax  
SP  
number  
;
LIMU  
DB  
DBM  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The LIMU command assigns the upper-limit amplitude value to a limit-line segment.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
LN Linear Scale  
LN  
Linear Scale  
Syntax  
;
LN  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Scales the amplitude (vertical graticule divisions) proportional to the input voltage, without changing the  
reference level. The bottom line of the graticule represents 0 V.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
M1 [one] Marker Off  
M1 [one]  
Marker Off  
Syntax  
;
M1  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The M1 [one] command blanks any markers showing on the display.  
NOTE  
Unlike the MKOFF ALL command (page 253), it blanks inactive markers as well.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
M2 [two] Marker Normal  
M2 [two]  
Marker Normal  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
M2  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
GHZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
S
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
MS  
US  
SC  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The M2 [two] command moves the active marker to the marker frequency. If the active marker type is  
not currently normal (for example, if it is delta), the M2 command changes it to a normal marker.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The functions of the M2 command are identical to the MKN command (page 251).  
If the active marker has not been declared with MKACT, a normal marker is  
turned on and this active marker is assumed to be marker number 1 [one].  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
M3 [three] Delta Marker  
M3 [three]  
Delta Marker  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
M3  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
GHZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
S
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
MS  
US  
SC  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The M3 [three] command computes the frequency and amplitude difference between the active marker  
and the delta (or difference) marker.  
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, the M3 command places one at the specified frequency  
or on the right hand edge of the display. If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, the M3  
command places an active marker at the center of the screen.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The active marker is the number 1 marker unless otherwise specified by the  
The functions of the M3 command are identical to the MKD command (page 245).  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
M4 [four] Marker Zoom  
M4 [four]  
Marker Zoom  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
M4  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
S
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
MS  
US  
SC  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The M4 [four] command, when specifying either the UP or DN parameter, increases or decreases the  
frequency span by one step. When specifying a numeric value, the M4 command moves the markers  
horizontal (X) position to the specified position in frequency or time.  
NOTE  
The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it does not set the  
active function to the active marker.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MA Marker Amplitude Output  
MA  
Marker Amplitude Output  
Syntax  
;
MA  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The MA command returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If both  
the active marker and the delta marker are displayed, the MA command returns the amplitude difference  
between the two markers.  
The format of the returned data when using the MKA command is dependent on the currently set trace  
data format (refer to TDF, MDS, O1, O2, O3, or O4) when the selected remote language 8566.  
8560 Series: The marker amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).  
NOTE  
The functions of the MA command are identical to the MKA command  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MC0 [zero] Marker Frequency Counter Off  
MC0 [zero]  
Marker Frequency Counter Off  
Syntax  
;
MC0  
Legacy Products  
8568A/B  
Description  
The MC0 [zero] command turns the marker frequency counter off.  
NOTE  
The functions of the MC0 [zero] command are identical to the MKFC OFF  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MC1 [one] Marker Frequency Counter On  
MC1 [one]  
Marker Frequency Counter On  
Syntax  
;
MC1  
Legacy Products  
8568A/B  
Description  
The MC1 [one] command turns the marker frequency counter on.  
NOTE  
The functions of the MC1 [one] command are identical to the MKFC ON  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MDS Measurement Data Size  
MDS  
Measurement Data Size  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MDS  
B
W
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The MDS command formats binary data in one of the following formats:  
B
selects a data size of one 8-bit byte.  
selects a data size of one word, which is two 8-bit bytes.  
W
If no keyword is specified in the command, the default value of W is assumed.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MEAN Trace Mean  
MEAN  
Trace Mean  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MEAN  
TRA  
TRB  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Returns the mean value of the specified trace in display units.  
NOTE  
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MEANPWR Mean Power measurement  
MEANPWR  
Mean Power measurement  
Syntax  
;
SP  
,
number  
,
MEANPWR  
TRA  
TRB  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The MEANPWR command measures the average power of the carrier during that portion of the time  
when it is on. The on state is defined as the time when the signal is within a selected number of dB of its  
peak level. The range of amplitudes that is defined as the on state can be set with the command. The  
amplitude range is set relative to the peak value of the signal.  
NOTE  
The MEANPWR command is similar to the CARRON command (page 123),  
except that the CARRON command defines ‘on’ as that time when the signal is  
within 20 dB of its peak level.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MEAS Meas  
MEAS  
Meas  
Syntax  
;
MEAS  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Returns the current sweep status. If the analyzer is set to sweep and make measurements continuously,  
the command returns CONTS. If it is set to make a single sweep with a single measurement, the  
command returns SNGLS.  
The analyzer can be set to single sweep using the SNGLS command and it can be set to continuos sweep  
using the CONTS command.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MF Marker Frequency Output  
MF  
Marker Frequency Output  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
;
MF  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
;
MF  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Returns the frequency (or time) of the on-screen active marker. If both an active marker and the delta  
marker are on the screen, the frequency difference is returned.  
NOTE  
8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count set to On  
when using the MF? command, the marker frequency count value is returned to the  
controller.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MINH Minimum Hold  
MINH  
Minimum Hold  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MINH  
TRA  
TRB  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The MINH command updates the chosen trace with the minimum signal level detected at each trace-data  
point from subsequent sweeps.  
For information on the trace settings of the X-series analyzers when legacy instrument trace settings are  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MINPOS Minimum X Position  
MINPOS  
Minimum X Position  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MINPOS  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The MINPOS command returns the X co-ordinate value that corresponds to the minimum amplitude of  
the specified trace.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MKA Marker Amplitude  
MKA  
Marker Amplitude  
Syntax  
;
MKA  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The MKA command returns the amplitude level of the active marker if the marker is on the screen. If  
both the active marker and the delta marker are displayed, the MKA command returns the amplitude  
difference between the two markers.  
8560 Series: The marker amplitude is always returned as an ASCII value (TDF P).  
8566 and 8568 Series: Specifies the amplitude of the active marker in dBm when the active marker is the  
fixed or amplitude type (refer to the MKTYPE command).  
NOTE  
The functions of the MKA command are identical to the MA command  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKACT Activate Marker  
MKACT  
Activate Marker  
Syntax  
marker  
number  
SP  
;
MKACT  
?
Table 4-24  
Item  
Description/Default  
Range  
1 to 4  
Marker  
Any valid integer. Default value is 1.  
Number  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
MKACT specifies the active marker. There can be four different markers, but only one marker can be  
active at any time.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKBW Marker Bandwidth  
MKBW  
Marker Bandwidth  
Syntax  
SP  
number  
,
;
MKBW  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Returns the bandwidth at the specified power level relative to an on-screen marker (if present) or the  
signal peak (if no on-screen marker is present).  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MKCF Marker to Center Frequency  
MKCF  
Marker to Center Frequency  
Syntax  
;
MKCF  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Sets the center frequency equal to the marker frequency and moves the marker to the center of the  
screen.  
NOTE  
The functions of the MKCF command are identical to the E2 command  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKD Marker Delta  
MKD  
Marker Delta  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
MKD  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
GHZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
S
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
MS  
US  
SC  
?
Step Increment: by 1/10 of the frequency span  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The MKD command computes the frequency and amplitude difference of the active marker and the delta  
marker. These values are displayed on the screen.  
If a delta marker is not displayed on the screen, the MKD command places one at the specified frequency  
or on the left or right hand edge of the display. If an active marker is not displayed on the screen, the  
MKD command places an active marker at the center of the screen.  
NOTE  
For 8566A/B and 8568A/B, the functions of the MKD command are identical to  
the M3 command (page 229).  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKF Marker Frequency  
MKF  
Marker Frequency  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
MKF  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
GHZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
S
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
MS  
US  
SC  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Specifies the frequency value of the active marker.  
8560 Series: The data is returned in ASCII format.  
For all other languages, the format of the returned data is determined by the TDF (Trace Data Format)  
(page 332) command and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by the MDS command  
(page 234).8566 and 8568 only: If the active marker has marker frequency count set to On when using  
the MKF? command, the marker frequency count value is returned to the controller.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MKFC Marker Counter  
MKFC  
Marker Counter  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MKFC  
ON  
OFF  
LF  
SP  
1
0
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Turns on or off the marker frequency counter. The resolution of the frequency marker counter is  
determined by the MKFCR command (page 248).  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The functions of the MKFC command are identical to the MC0 [zero] command  
(page 232) and MC1 [one] command (page 233).  
For 8568A/B, the functions of the MKFC command are identical to the MC0 or  
MC1 command.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKFCR Marker Counter Resolution  
MKFCR  
Marker Counter Resolution  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
real  
;
SP  
HZ  
MKFCR  
LF  
KHZ  
CR  
SP  
,
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
SP  
OA  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
real  
;
MKFCR  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
MZ  
SP  
UP  
GZ  
DN  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKFCR Marker Counter Resolution  
Description  
Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter. The marker counter resolution value is always given  
either in Hertz or in seconds depending on whether the analyzer is operating in the frequency domain or  
the time domain.  
NOTE  
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKFCR command are identical to the  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
MKMIN Marker Minimum  
MKMIN  
Marker Minimum  
Syntax  
;
MKMIN  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Moves the active marker to the minimum value detected.  
NOTE  
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKMIN command are identical to  
the KSN command (page 205).  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKN Marker Normal  
MKN  
Marker Normal  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
MKN  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
GHZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
S
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
MS  
US  
SC  
?
Step Increment: by 1/10 of the frequency span.  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The MKN command moves the active marker to the specified frequency. If no marker is currently turned  
on, a normal marker is turned on. If the active marker type is not currently normal (for example, it is  
delta), the MKN command changes it to a normal marker.  
NOTE  
The functions of the MKN command are identical to the M2 [two] command  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKNOISE Marker Noise  
MKNOISE  
Marker Noise  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MKNOISE  
ON  
OFF  
LF  
SP  
1
0
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Displays the average RMS noise density at the marker.  
NOTE  
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKNOISE command are identical to  
the KSM command (page 203).  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Programming Commands  
MKOFF Marker Off  
MKOFF  
Marker Off  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MKOFF  
ALL  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Turns off either the active marker or all the markers. If the ALL parameter is omitted, only the active  
marker is turned off.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKP Marker Position  
MKP  
Marker Position  
Syntax  
SP  
integer  
;
MKP  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Specifies the marker position horizontally, in display units.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MKPK Marker Peak  
MKPK  
Marker Peak  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MKPK  
HI  
NH  
LF  
NR  
NL  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Executing MKPK HI, or simply MKPK (no secondary keyword), positions the active marker at the  
highest signal detected. If an active marker is on the screen, the MKPK parameters move the marker as  
follows:  
HI (highest)  
moves the active marker to the highest peak.  
NH (next highest) moves the active marker to the next signal peak of lower amplitude.  
NR (next right) moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the right of the current marker.  
NL (next left)  
moves the active marker to the next signal peak to the left of the current marker.  
NOTE  
The functions of the MKPK command (no secondary keyword) and the MKPK HI  
command are identical to the E1 commands: (page 147).  
NOTE  
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKPK NH command are similar to  
the KSK command (page 199), except that KSK does not take in to account the  
marker peak excursion or marker peak threshold values. For more details on  
marker peak excursion, see the MKPX command (page 257).  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKPT Marker Threshold  
MKPT  
Marker Threshold  
Syntax  
SP  
SP  
number  
;
MKPT  
DBM  
LF  
UP  
DN  
OA  
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The MKPT command sets the minimum amplitude level from which a peak on the trace can be detected.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKPX Marker Peak Excursion  
MKPX  
Marker Peak Excursion  
Syntax  
SP  
SP  
real  
;
MKPX  
DB  
LF  
UP  
DN  
OA  
CR  
SP  
,
?
Preset State: 6 dB  
Step Increment: 1 dB  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Specifies the minimum signal excursion for the analyzer’s internal peak identification routine.  
The default value is 6 dB. In this case, any signal with an excursion of less than 6 dB on either side of the  
marker would not be identified. Thus, if an MKPK NH command were to be executed on such a signal,  
the analyzer would not place a marker on this signal peak.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKREAD Marker Readout  
MKREAD  
Marker Readout  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MKREAD  
FRQ  
SWT  
IST  
PER  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Selects the type of active trace information displayed by the spectrum analyzer marker readout.  
The MKREAD command can select the following types of active trace information:  
FRQ  
SWT  
IST  
frequency  
sweep time  
inverse sweep time  
period  
PER  
NOTE  
The Inverse Sweep Time (IST) readout is only available when using a delta marker  
in zero span.  
The results of the data depend on the MKREAD parameter and the frequency span, and whether the  
marker delta function is used.  
Table 4-25  
MKREAD  
Type  
Non-Zero Span  
Delta  
Non-Zero Span  
Zero Span  
N/A  
Zero Span Delta  
N/A  
FRQ  
Reads frequency  
Reads delta  
frequency  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKREAD Marker Readout  
Table 4-25  
MKREAD  
Type  
Non-Zero Span  
Delta  
Non-Zero Span  
Zero Span  
Waveform  
measurements of  
detected  
Zero Span Delta  
SWT  
IST  
Reads time since the Reads delta time  
Waveform  
measurements of  
detected modulation  
start of sweep  
between end points  
modulation  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Computes frequency  
corresponding to  
delta of markers.  
Performs  
1/ (T T )  
1
2
PER  
Period of frequency  
(Pulse measurement) N/A  
delta time  
N/A  
NOTE  
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) is not available in the Programming Code  
Compatibility Suite option.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
MKRL Marker to Reference Level  
MKRL  
Marker to Reference Level  
Syntax  
;
MKRL  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The MKRL command moves the active marker to the reference level.  
NOTE  
The functions of the MKRL command are identical to the E4 command  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKSP Marker Span  
MKSP  
Marker Span  
Syntax  
;
MKSP  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The MKSP command operates only when the delta marker is On (see MKD (page 245) or M3  
(page 229)). When the delta marker is On and MKSP is executed, the delta marker and active marker  
determine the start and stop frequencies. The left marker specifies the start frequency, and the right  
marker specifies the stop frequency. If marker delta is Off, there is no operation.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
If the active marker is not a delta marker, there is no change in its position.  
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, The functions of the MKSP command are identical to the  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKSS Marker to Step Size  
MKSS  
Marker to Step Size  
Syntax  
;
MKSS  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Sets the center-frequency step-size equal to the marker frequency. If the analyzer is in the delta mode,  
the step size is set to the frequency difference between the active and the delta marker.  
NOTE  
When the marker is a delta marker, the functions of the MKSS command are  
identical to the E3 command (page 149).  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKT Marker Time  
MKT  
Marker Time  
Syntax  
SP  
real  
;
MKT  
S
MS  
US  
SC  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Places a marker at a position that corresponds to a specified point in time during the sweep.  
NOTE  
The default unit of time is seconds (‘S’ or ‘SC’).  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MKTRACE Marker Trace  
MKTRACE  
Marker Trace  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MKTRACE  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
?
NOTE  
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds  
to Trace 3.  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Moves the active marker to the corresponding position in Trace 1, Trace 2, or Trace 3.  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
MKTRACK Marker Track  
MKTRACK  
Marker Track  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MKTRACK  
ON  
OFF  
LF  
SP  
1
0
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the analyzer display and keeps the  
signal peak at center screen.  
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired signal before turning on  
MKTRACK.  
NOTE  
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the MKTRACK command are identical  
to the MT0 [zero] command (page 269) and the MT1 [one] command (page 270).  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MKTYPE Marker Type  
MKTYPE  
Marker Type  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MKTYPE  
PSN  
AMP  
FIXED  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Specifies the type of marker.  
MKTYPE PSN allows the marker to be positioned horizontally in display units (default). Use the MKP  
and MKF commands to position the marker.  
MKTYPE AMP allows the marker to be positioned according to amplitude. Use the MKA command to  
position the marker.  
MKTYPE FIXED allows a marker to be placed at any fixed point on the display. Use the MKP, MKF,  
and MKA commands to position the marker.  
NOTE  
Marker type can only be set for an active marker. The marker type is reset to PSN  
when the marker is turned off (using the MKOFF command) or the instrument is  
preset.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ML Mixer Level  
ML  
Mixer Level  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
;
SP  
SP  
real  
ML  
DBM  
LF  
UP  
DN  
CR  
SP  
,
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
SP  
real  
;
ML  
DB  
DM  
MV  
UV  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The ML command specifies the maximum signal level that is applied to the input mixer for a signal that  
is equal to or below the reference level.  
The effective mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the input attenuator setting.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
ML Mixer Level  
NOTE  
If an external amplifier gain value is set, the mixer level is determined using the  
following equation:  
Mixer Level = Ref. Level - Attenuation + Ext. Amplifier Gain  
The external amplifier gain is not preset by doing an IP command in case the  
analyzer is measuring a large signal. This is to protect the analyzer from damage  
from a large signal. For a helpful suggestion, see Chapter 3 , “Hints and Tips,” on  
NOTE  
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the ML command are identical to the KS,  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
MT0 [zero] Marker Track Off  
MT0 [zero]  
Marker Track Off  
Syntax  
;
MT0  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The MT0 [zero] command disables the marker tracking mode.  
NOTE  
The functions of the MT0 [zero] command are identical to the MKTRACK OFF  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MT1 [one] Marker Track On  
MT1 [one]  
Marker Track On  
Syntax  
;
MT1  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Moves the signal on which the active marker is located to the center of the analyzer display and keeps the  
signal peak at center screen.  
To keep a drifting signal at center screen, place the active marker on the desired signal before issuing an  
MT1 [one] command.  
NOTE  
The functions of the MT1 command are identical to the MKTRACK ON command  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
MXMH Maximum Hold  
MXMH  
Maximum Hold  
Syntax  
SP  
;
MXMH  
TRA  
TRB  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Updates each trace element with the maximum level detected.  
MXMH updates the specified trace (either Trace A or Trace B) with a new value from a detector only if  
the new value is larger than the previous trace data value.  
NOTE  
The functions of the MXMH command are identical to the A2 command  
NOTE  
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.  
For information on the trace settings of the X-series analyzers when legacy instrument trace settings are  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
NORMLIZE Normalize Trace Data  
NORMLIZE  
Normalize Trace Data  
Syntax  
;
SP  
NORMLIZE  
ON  
OFF  
OA  
1
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
SP  
0
?
The preset state is OFF.  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Activates or de-activates the normalization routine for stimulus-response measurements. This function  
subtracts trace B from trace A, offsets the result by the value of the normalized reference position (NRL)  
and displays the result in trace A.  
If active (ON), the NORMLIZE command is automatically turned off with an instrument preset (IP) or at  
power on.  
The OA option only returns the current value to the controller; it does not set the active function to the  
normalization state.  
Normalization is not available when using linear mode and is mutually exclusive with other trace math.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
NRL Normalized Reference Level  
NRL  
Normalized Reference Level  
Syntax  
LF  
LF  
SP  
number  
NRL  
DB  
?
CR  
SP  
,
The preset value is 0 dB.  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Sets the normalized reference level. It is intended to be used with the NORMLIZE command. When  
using NRL, the input attenuator and IF step gains are not affected. This function is a trace-offset function  
enabling the user to offset the displayed trace without introducing hardware switching errors into the  
stimulus-response measurement. The unit of measure for NRL is dB.  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
NRPOS Normalized Reference Position  
NRPOS  
Normalized Reference Position  
Syntax  
;
SP  
SP  
number  
NRPOS  
LF  
UP  
DN  
OA  
CR  
SP  
,
?
The preset value is 10.  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The NRPOS command adjusts the normalized reference-position that corresponds to the position on the  
graticule where the difference between the measured and calibrated traces reside. The dB value of the  
normalized reference position is equal to the normalized reference level. The normalized reference  
position can be adjusted between 0.0 and 10.0, corresponding to the bottom and top graticule lines,  
respectively.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
O1 [one] Format - Display Units  
O1 [one]  
Format - Display Units  
Syntax  
;
O1  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The O1 [one] command transmits trace amplitude and position information as decimal values in display  
units.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
O2 [two] Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes  
O2 [two]  
Format - Two 8-Bit Bytes  
Syntax  
;
O2  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The O2 [two] command transmits trace amplitude and position information as two 8-bit binary numbers,  
or one instruction word.  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
O3 [three] Format - Real Amplitude Units  
O3 [three]  
Format - Real Amplitude Units  
Syntax  
;
O3  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The O3 [three] command transmits trace vertical axis information only, in measurement units of Hz,  
dBm, dB, volts or seconds.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
O4 [four] Format - One 8-Bit Byte  
O4 [four]  
Format - One 8-Bit Byte  
Syntax  
;
O4  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The O4 [four] command transmits trace amplitude information only as a binary number.  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
OA or ? Query Active Function  
OA or ?  
Query Active Function  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Query active function.  
The active functions are ACPBW, ACPSP, AT, CF, CRTHPOS, CRTVPOS, DA, DL, DOTDENS, FA,  
FB, FMGAIN, GD, GL, LG, MKA, MKD, MKFCR, MKN, MKPAUSE, MKPX, ML, NDB, NRL, RB,  
RCLS, ROFFSET, RL, RLPOS, SAVES, SAVRCLN, SETDATE, SETTIME, SP, SQLCH, SRCALC,  
SRCAT, SRCPOFS, SRCPSWP, SRCPWR, SRCTK, SS, ST, TH, TVLINE, VB, VBR, and  
user-defined active function specified by the ACTDEF command.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
OCCUP Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth  
OCCUP  
Percent Occupied Power Bandwidth  
Syntax  
;
SP  
number  
OCCUP  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The OCCUP command is used to query the current value of the percent occupied power. This value is set  
by the DELMKBW (page 139) and the PWRBW command (page 290) command. The OCCUP  
command can also be used to set the percent occupied power.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
OL Output Learn String  
OL  
Output Learn String  
Syntax  
80 byte binary  
string  
SP  
;
OL  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The OL command transmits information to the controller that describes the state of the analyzer when  
the OL command is executed. This information is called the “learn string.” The learn string can be sent  
from the controller memory back to the analyzer to restore the analyzer to its original state.  
NOTE  
The OL command is not completely supported, due to differences between the  
X-Series and 8566/8568. The following table outlines each byte of the array and  
the bits supported within that byte.  
Byte  
Support Information  
1
Fixed decimal value 31  
Fixed decimal value 118  
Supported  
2
3 to 9  
10  
Supported  
11  
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0  
Supported  
12 to 17  
18  
Supported: Bits 6, 2, 1 and 0  
Unsupported: Bits 7, 5, 4, and 3  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
OL Output Learn String  
Byte  
Support Information  
19  
Supported:  
Bits 7, 6, 4, 3, and 0  
Bit 5 on X-Series only  
Unsupported:  
Bits 1 and 2  
20  
Supported: Trigger Mode, Sweep Mode, TRB  
Clearwrite status  
Unsupported: Recorder Output  
Supported  
21  
22  
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0  
Supported  
23 to 25  
26  
Supported: Scale Type, Log Scale Factor, and  
Display State  
Unsupported: XY Recorder  
Supported  
27  
28  
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0  
Supported  
29 to 30  
31  
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0  
Supported  
32 to 37  
38  
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0  
Supported  
39 to 45  
46 to 47  
VAVG count limit, value returned is always  
current count value * 2.  
48 to 53  
54 to 57  
Supported  
If active marker is a delta marker, active marker  
absolute Y position only supported for X-Series  
58 to 61  
If active marker is a delta marker, reference  
marker absolute Y position only supported for  
X-Series  
62  
63  
64  
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0  
Supported  
Supported: Log Amp Units, R3, R2, and R4  
Unsupported: Stop sweep  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
OL Output Learn String  
Byte  
Support Information  
65  
Supported: Lin Amp Units, TRC View Status  
Unsupported: Bits 5 and 4 (always set HI)  
66 to 71  
72  
Supported  
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0  
Supported: Video Avg  
73  
Unsupported: Power on last, Ext Ref Lvl, Fast  
HP-IB, Bit 4 (always set HI)  
74 to 77  
78  
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0  
Unsupported  
79  
Unsupported: Fixed decimal 0  
Fixed decimal 162  
80  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
OT Output Trace Annotations  
OT  
Output Trace Annotations  
Syntax  
;
OT  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The OT command sends 32 character-strings to the controller. Each character-string can be up to 64  
characters long.  
NOTE  
The 'data invalid indicator' status report given in string 27 of the returned text is  
only supported on X-Series analyzers.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
PEAKS Peaks  
PEAKS  
Peaks  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
,
,
;
PEAKS  
TRA  
TRB  
TRA  
TRB  
AMP  
FRQ  
?
SP  
SP  
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
,
,
;
PEAKS  
TRA  
TRA  
TRB  
AMP  
FRQ  
TRB  
TRC  
TRC  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The PEAKS command sorts the signal peaks in the source trace by frequency or amplitude, and sends  
the results to destination trace.  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
PKPOS Peak Position  
PKPOS  
Peak Position  
Syntax  
SP  
;
PKPOS  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
Legacy Products  
8568  
Description  
The PKPOS command returns the X co-ordinate value of the maximum peak in the specified trace.  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
PLOT Plot  
PLOT  
Plot  
Syntax  
;
SP  
value  
,
value  
,
value  
,
value  
PLOT  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The PLOT command allows you transfer trace data, graticule and annotation information to a printer  
using a parallel port.  
The legacy analyzers transferred data directly to a plotter via the GPIB connection. The PLOT command  
now transfers data to a printer, and prints the entire screen.  
Although the PLOT command reads in plotter dimension values, these are ignored.  
NOTE  
In legacy instruments, the PLOT command also returns HPGL. The X-series  
instruments with the N9061A application installed does not return HPGL.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
PP Preselector Peak  
PP  
Preselector Peak  
Syntax  
;
PP  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B  
Description  
The PP command optimizes preselector tracking to peak the amplitude of a signal at the active marker. If  
a marker is not on the screen, PP places a marker at the highest signal level, and optimizes preselector  
tracking at that frequency.  
NOTE  
This command is only supported when the X-series analyzer’s maximum  
frequency limit is greater than 3.6 GHz. If the command is issued on an analyzer  
with a maximum frequency limit of 3.6 GHz or less the command is not  
implemented and no error is generated.  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
PRINT Print  
PRINT  
Print  
Syntax  
;
PRINT  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Transfers trace data, graticule and annotation of the analyzer screen directly to the X-series analyzer’s  
default printer.  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
PWRBW Power Bandwidth  
PWRBW  
Power Bandwidth  
Syntax  
8560 Series:  
;
S
P
,
number  
PWRBW  
TRA  
TRB  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
PWRBW  
S
P
,
number  
;
TRA  
?
TRB  
TRC  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Computes the combined power of all signal responses in the specified trace, and returns the bandwidth of  
the specified percentage of total power. The number in the command is a percentage value, that is, it has  
a range of 0 to 100.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
If the percent total power is 100%, the power bandwidth equals the frequency  
span.  
On the 8566A/B analyzer, this command stops the trace. That is not the case with  
this the N9061A application.  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
R1 [one] Illegal Command SRQ  
R1 [one]  
Illegal Command SRQ  
Syntax  
;
R1  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The R1 [one] command deactivates all analyzer service requests (SRQs) except SRQ140, the  
illegal-command service request.  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
R2 [two] End-of-Sweep SRQ  
R2 [two]  
End-of-Sweep SRQ  
Syntax  
;
R2  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The R2 [two] command activates the end-of-sweep and illegal-command service requests.  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
R3 [three] Hardware Broken SRQ  
R3 [three]  
Hardware Broken SRQ  
Syntax  
;
R3  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The R3 [three] command activates the hardware-broken and illegal-command service requests.  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
R4 [four] Units-Key-Pressed SRQ  
R4 [four]  
Units-Key-Pressed SRQ  
Syntax  
;
R4  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The R4 [four] command activate the units-key-pressed and illegal-command SRQs. Same as RQS 34.  
NOTE  
X-Series analyzers cannot replicate the units-key-pressed service request since no  
front panel interaction is supported.  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
RB Resolution Bandwidth  
RB  
Resolution Bandwidth  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
real  
;
RB  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
LF  
SP  
UP  
CR  
SP  
,
GHZ  
KZ  
DN  
AUTO  
MAN  
OA  
MZ  
GZ  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
real  
RB  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
MZ  
GZ  
?
Preset State:  
8560 series: 1 MHz, auto coupled  
8566A/B, 8568A/B: 3 MHz, auto coupled  
Step Increment: In a 1, 3, 10 series  
Preset State: 3 MHz, auto coupled  
Step Increment: In a 1, 3, 10 series  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
RB Resolution Bandwidth  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The RB command specifies the resolution bandwidth. Available bandwidths are 1 Hz, 3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30  
Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz, 1 MHz, and 3 MHz. The resolution bandwidths,  
video bandwidths, and sweep time are normally coupled. Executing RB decouples them. Execute CR  
(page 134) to re-establish coupling.  
NOTE  
Default values on X-Series analyzers may vary from the legacy analyzers. Refer to  
the X-Series User’s and Programmer’s Reference to find out any restrictions that  
may apply.  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
RBR Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio  
RBR  
Resolution Bandwidth to Span Ratio  
Syntax  
;
SP  
SP  
real  
RBR  
LF  
UP  
DN  
OA  
CR  
SP  
?
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
This command sets the coupling ratio between the frequency span and the resolution bandwidth. It  
allows you to set the Span/RBW ratio to 1/<value>, where <value> is set by the user.  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
RC Recall State  
RC  
Recall State  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
;
SP  
SP  
RC  
LAST  
PWRON  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
number  
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
digit  
;
RC  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Recalls analyzer state data from the specified state register in the analyzer’s memory.  
Registers one through six are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel  
configuration) saved with the SAVES command (page 308) or the SV command (page 324).  
NOTE  
The functions of the RC command are identical to the RCLS command (page 299).  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
RCLS Recall State  
RCLS  
Recall State  
Syntax  
;
SP  
RCLS  
LAST  
LF  
PWRON  
CR  
SP  
,
SP  
number  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Recalls analyzer state data from the specified state register in the analyzer’s memory.  
Registers one through six are reserved for the user, and contain instrument states (such as front panel  
configuration) saved with the SAVES command (page 308) or the SV command (page 324).  
NOTE  
The functions of the RCLS command are identical to the RC command (page 298).  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
REV Revision  
REV  
Revision  
Syntax  
;
REV  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The REV command returns the firmware revision number.  
In X-Series analyzers, this command returns the build date of the N9061A application that you have  
installed in your analyzer. The date is returned in YYMMDD format (where YY is the number of years  
since 1950, and MM is the month and DD is the date).  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
RL Reference Level  
RL  
Reference Level  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
real  
;
RL  
DBM  
DBMV  
DBUV  
MV  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
UV  
V
SP  
UP  
MW  
UW  
DN  
OA  
W
DM  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
SP  
real  
;
RL  
DB  
DM  
MV  
UV  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Specifies the amplitude level of the top graticule line on the display. This represents the reference level.  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
RL Reference Level  
CAUTION  
NOTE  
Signal levels above +30 dBm will damage the analyzer. For a helpful suggestion  
The 8566A/B and 8568A/B have the reference level from -89.9 dBm to +30 dBm.  
The range of reference level for the MXA and PXA is -170 dBm to +30 dBm with  
0 dB attanuation). The range of refernce level for EXA is -170 dBm to +23 dBm.  
NOTE  
If the display line is on, changing the reference level does not adjust the position of  
the display line.  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
RMS Root Mean Square Value  
RMS  
Root Mean Square Value  
Syntax  
SP  
;
RMS  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The RMS command returns the RMS value of the trace, in display units.  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
ROFFSET Reference Level Offset  
ROFFSET  
Reference Level Offset  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
;
SP  
SP  
real  
ROFFSET  
DB  
LF  
UP  
DN  
CR  
SP  
,
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
real  
;
ROFFSET  
DM  
MV  
UV  
DB  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Offsets all amplitude readouts without affecting the trace.  
Once activated, the ROFFSET command displays the amplitude offset on the left side of the screen.  
Entering ROFFSET 0 or presetting the analyzer eliminates an amplitude offset.  
NOTE  
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the ROFFSET command are identical to  
the KSZ command (page 214).  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
RQS Request Service Conditions  
RQS  
Request Service Conditions  
Syntax  
SP  
number  
;
RQS  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Sets a bit mask for service requests, each service request has a corresponding bit number and decimal  
equivalent of that bit number as shown in the table below.Use the decimal equivalents to set the bit mask.  
For example, to set a mask for bits 4 and 5, add the decimal equivalents (16 + 32 = 48), then send the  
command RQS 48.  
Table 4-26  
Status Byte Definition  
Bit#  
State  
Description  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RQS  
Request Service  
Error Present  
Command Complete  
Any command completed.  
End of Sweep  
Message  
Any sweep completed.  
Display message appears.  
Trigger activated.  
Trigger  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
S1[one] Continuous Sweep  
S1[one]  
Continuous Sweep  
Syntax  
;
S1  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The S1 command sets the analyzer to continuous sweep mode. In the continuous sweep mode, the  
analyzer takes its next sweep as soon as possible after the current sweep (as long as the trigger conditions  
are met). A sweep may temporarily be interrupted by data entries made over the remote interface.  
NOTE  
The functions of the command S1 are identical to the CONTS command  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
S2 [two] Single Sweep  
S2 [two]  
Single Sweep  
Syntax  
;
S2  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The S2 command sets the analyzer to single sweep mode. Each subsequent time that the command S2 is  
sent, one sweep is started if the trigger conditions are met.  
NOTE  
The functions of the S2 command are similar to the SNGLS command (page 313).  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
SAVES Save State  
SAVES  
Save State  
Syntax  
;
SP  
digit  
SAVES  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Saves the current state of the analyzer in any of the registers one through six.  
NOTE  
The functions of the SAVES command are identical to the SV command  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
SER Serial Number  
SER  
Serial Number  
Syntax  
;
SER  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The SER command returns the X-series analyzer serial number to the controller.  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
SETDATE Set Date  
SETDATE  
Set Date  
Syntax  
;
SP  
number  
SETDATE  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The SETDATE command sets the date of the real-time clock of the analyzer. The date takes the form  
YYMMDD (Year, Month, Day)  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
SETTIME Set Time  
SETTIME  
Set Time  
Syntax  
;
SP  
number  
SETTIME  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The SETTIME command sets the date of the real-time clock of the analyzer. The time takes the form  
HHMMSS (Hour, Minute, Second).  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
SMOOTH Smooth Trace  
SMOOTH  
Smooth Trace  
Syntax  
number  
of points  
SP  
,
;
SMOOTH  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
Prerequisite Commands: TS when using trace data.  
NOTE  
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds  
to Trace 3.  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified for the running average.  
Each point value is replaced with the average of the values (in measurement units) of the given number  
of points centered on it. Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing  
resolution. If the number of points is an even number, then the number of points is increased by one.  
Smoothing decreases at the endpoints.  
NOTE  
Some differences may be noticed between the smoothed trace in the legacy  
analyzers and the smoothed trace using the same signal in X-Series analyzers.  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
SNGLS Single Sweep  
SNGLS  
Single Sweep  
Syntax  
;
SNGLS  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Sets the analyzer to single-sweep mode. Each time TS (take sweep) is sent, one sweep taken as long as  
the trigger conditions are met.  
NOTE  
The functions of the SNGLS command are identical to the S2 command  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
SP Frequency Span  
SP  
Frequency Span  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
real  
;
SP  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
MZ  
GZ  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
FULL  
ZERO  
LAST  
?
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
SP Frequency Span  
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
real  
;
SP  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
MZ  
GZ  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Step Increment: 1, 2, 5, 10 sequence (up to the stop frequency of the analyzer)  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Changes the total displayed frequency range symmetrically about the center frequency.  
If resolution and video bandwidths are coupled to the span width, the bandwidths change with the span  
width to provide a predetermined level of resolution and noise averaging. Likewise, the sweep time  
changes to maintain a calibrated display, if coupled. All of these functions are normally coupled, unless  
RB (page 295), VB (page 347), or ST (page 318) have been executed.  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SRQ Service Request  
SRQ  
Service Request  
Syntax  
SP  
digit  
;
SRQ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The SRQ command sends a service request to the controller when the SRQ operand fits the mask  
supplied with the RQS command.  
NOTE  
The N9061A application does not support the setting of bit 1 (units-key-pressed)  
of the status byte. Bit-1 of the status byte is always set to Off.  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
SS Center Frequency Step Size  
SS  
Center Frequency Step Size  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
real  
;
SS  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
LF  
SP  
UP  
CR  
SP  
,
DN  
AUTO  
MAN  
OA  
MZ  
GZ  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
real  
;
SS  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
MZ  
GZ  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The SS command specifies center frequency step size.  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
ST Sweep Time  
ST  
Sweep Time  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
real  
;
ST  
S
MS  
US  
SC  
LF  
SP  
UP  
CR  
SP  
,
DN  
AUTO  
MAN  
OA  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
real  
;
ST  
SC  
MS  
US  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The ST command specifies the time in which the analyzer sweeps the displayed frequency or time span.  
NOTE  
The OA option in the ST command behaves in the same manner as the ST?  
command in that it returns the current value to the controller. However, the OA  
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
ST Sweep Time  
option does not set the active function to Sweep Time.  
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
STB Status Byte Query  
STB  
Status Byte Query  
Syntax  
;
STB  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The STB command returns to the controller the decimal equivalent of the bits set in the status byte (see  
the RQS (page 305) and SRQ (page 316) commands). STB is equivalent to a serial poll.  
320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
STDEV Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes  
STDEV  
Standard Deviation of Trace Amplitudes  
Syntax  
SP  
;
STDEV  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
Prerequisite Commands: TS when using trace data  
NOTE  
TRA corresponds to Trace 1, TRB corresponds to Trace 2, and TRC corresponds  
to Trace 3.  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Returns the standard deviation of the trace amplitude in display units.  
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
SUM Sum  
SUM  
Sum  
Syntax  
8560 Series:  
;
S
p
,
?
SUM  
TRA  
TRB  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
;
S
p
,
?
SUM  
TRA  
LF  
TRB  
TRC  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Returns the sum of all the trace values to the controller.  
NOTE  
The 8560 series of analyzers returns display units, range (0-610)*601 points or if  
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
SUM Sum  
Trace Data Format (TDF) is set to M, it returns ASCII.  
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
SV Save State  
SV  
Save State  
Syntax  
SP  
digit  
;
SV  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Saves the current state of the analyzer in any of the registers one through six.  
NOTE  
The functions of the SV command are identical to the SAVES command  
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
SWPCPL Sweep Couple  
SWPCPL  
Sweep Couple  
Syntax  
SP  
;
SWPCPL  
SA  
SR  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
The preset value is SA.  
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Selects either a stimulus-response (SR) or signal-analyzer (SA) auto-coupled sweep time. In stimulus  
response mode, auto-coupled sweep times are usually much faster for swept response measurements.  
Stimulus response auto-coupled sweep times are typically valid in stimulus-response measurements  
when the system frequency span is less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test.  
325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
T1 [one] Free Run Trigger  
T1 [one]  
Free Run Trigger  
Syntax  
;
T1  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The T1 [one] command sets the analyzer sweep to free run trigger mode.  
NOTE  
The functions of the T1 [one] command are identical to the TM FREE command  
326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
T2 [two] Line Trigger  
T2 [two]  
Line Trigger  
Syntax  
;
T2  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The T2 [two] command sets the analyzer sweep to line trigger mode.  
NOTE  
The functions of the T2 [two] command are identical to the TM LINE command  
327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
T3 [three] External Trigger  
T3 [three]  
External Trigger  
Syntax  
;
T3  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The T3 [three] command sets the analyzer sweep to external trigger mode.  
NOTE  
The functions of the T3 [three] command are identical to the TM EXT command  
328  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
T4 [four] Video Trigger  
T4 [four]  
Video Trigger  
Syntax  
;
T4  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The T4 [four] command sets the analyzer sweep to video trigger mode.  
NOTE  
The functions of the T4 [four] command are identical to the TM VID command  
329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
TA Trace A  
TA  
Trace A  
Syntax  
;
TA  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Returns trace A amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller.  
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the screen.  
Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats as  
determined by the O1 [one] (page 275), O2 [two] (page 276), O3 [three] (page 277) and O4 [four]  
commands (page 278).The format of the returned data is also affected by the TDF (Trace Data Format)  
(page 332) command and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by the MDS command  
330  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
TB Trace B  
TB  
Trace B  
Syntax  
;
TB  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Returns trace B amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller.  
The display unit values are transferred in sequential order (from left to right) as seen on the screen.  
Display unit values can be transferred to the controller in any one of the four output formats as  
determined by the O1 [one] (page 275), O2 [two] (page 276), O3 [three] (page 277) and O4 [four]  
commands (page 278). The format of the returned data is also affected by the TDF (Trace Data Format)  
(page 332) command and, if TDF B (binary data format) has been selected, by the MDS command  
331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
TDF Trace Data Format  
TDF  
Trace Data Format  
Syntax  
SP  
;
TDF  
P
A
LF  
I
CR  
SP  
,
M
B
?
The preset value for TDF is P.  
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Formats trace information for return to the controller.  
The different trace data formats are as follows:  
M selects the ASCII data format.  
P selects parameter data format. Numbers are in Hz, Volts, Watts, dBm, dBmV, DBuV, DBV.  
Specifying A returns data as an A-block data field. The MDS command determines whether data  
Specifying I returns data as an I-block data field. The MDS command determines whether data  
B selects binary data format. The MDS command determines whether data comprises one or two  
8-bit bytes  
332  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
TH Threshold  
TH  
Threshold  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
real  
;
TH  
DM  
MV  
UV  
DB  
LF  
SP  
UP  
CR  
SP  
,
DN  
ON  
OFF  
OA  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
SP  
real  
;
TH  
DM  
MV  
UV  
DB  
UP  
DN  
OA  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The TH command blanks signal responses below the threshold level, similar to a base line clipper. The  
threshold level is nine major divisions below the reference level, unless otherwise specified. The UP and  
DN commands move the threshold 10 dB.  
333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
THE Threshold Enable  
THE  
Threshold Enable  
Syntax  
SP  
;
THE  
ON  
OFF  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Turns the threshold on or off.  
334  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
TIMEDATE Time Date  
TIMEDATE  
Time Date  
Syntax  
;
SP  
number  
TIMEDATE  
LF  
?
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Sets and returns the date and time of the real-time clock of the analyzer. The number takes the form  
YYMMDDHHMMSS (Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute, Second).  
TIMEDATE ON and TIMEDATE OFF commands are supported on some models of the 8560 series.  
This set of commands displays or hides the time and date in the graticule. The N9061A application on  
the X-series analyzers does not support these commands but accepts them and does not display a CMD  
ERR error or CMD NOT SUPPORTED error.  
NOTE  
This command changes the system clock of the instrument and may invalidate any  
time-based licenses installed on the instrument.  
335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
TITLE Title  
TITLE  
Title  
Syntax  
string  
delimiter  
string  
delimiter  
;
char  
real  
TITLE  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The TITLE command activates the screen title mode, enabling you to enter your own title for the screen.  
Valid string delimiters which must be used to start and terminate the title are shown below. See 8560  
Series User’s Guide for more details.  
!
$
%
&
/
:
=
\
~
@
336  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
TM Trigger Mode  
TM  
Trigger Mode  
Syntax  
SP  
;
TM  
FREE  
VID  
LF  
LINE  
EXT  
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Selects a trigger mode: free, line, video, or external.  
NOTE  
The functions of the TM command are identical to the T1 (page 326), T2  
337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Programming Commands  
TRA Trace Data Input and Output  
TRA  
Trace Data Input and Output  
Syntax  
;
TRA  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The TRA command transfers Trace A amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller. The format  
depends on the trace data format selected. See the TDF command (page 332) for details on formatting.  
338  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
TRB Trace Data Input and Output  
TRB  
Trace Data Input and Output  
Syntax  
;
TRB  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The TRB command transfers Trace B amplitude values between the analyzer and the controller. The  
format depends on the trace data format selected. See “TDF Trace Data Format” on page 332 for details  
on formatting.  
339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
TRC Trace Data Input and Output  
TRC  
Trace Data Input and Output  
Syntax  
;
TRC  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The TRC command transfers Trace Amplitude values from the analyzer to the controller. The format  
depends on the trace data format selected. See the TDF command (page 332) for details on formatting.  
340  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
TRDSP Trace Display  
TRDSP  
Trace Display  
Syntax  
SP  
,
;
TRDSP  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
ON  
OFF  
1
SP  
0
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Displays a trace or turns it off.  
341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
TRIGPOL Trigger Polarity  
TRIGPOL  
Trigger Polarity  
Syntax  
;
SP  
TRIGPOL  
POS  
NEG  
?
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
Selects the edge (positive or negative) of the trigger input that causes the trigger event. TRIGPOL is  
available in all trigger modes.  
342  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
TRSTAT Trace State  
TRSTAT  
Trace State  
Syntax  
;
TRSTAT  
?
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The TRSTAT command returns trace states to the controller. Valid trace states are Clear-write, Off,  
View, Maximum Hold, and Blank.  
Table 4-27  
Possible Trace States  
Trace State  
Description  
Trace State Data  
Returned  
Clear-write  
View  
CLRW  
VIEW  
Blank  
BLANK  
Off  
No data is returned  
MXMH  
Maximum Hold  
343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
TS Take Sweep  
TS  
Take Sweep  
Syntax  
;
TS  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Starts and completes one full sweep before the next command is executed. A TS command is required  
for each sweep in the single-sweep mode. TS always restarts a sweep even if a sweep is already in  
progress.  
344  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
VAVG Video Average  
VAVG  
Video Average  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
average  
length  
SP  
;
VAVG  
LF  
SP  
UP  
DN  
CR  
SP  
,
ON  
OFF  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
average  
length  
SP  
SP  
;
VAVG  
ON  
OFF  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Enables the video-averaging function, which averages trace points to smooth the displayed trace. When  
queried, the VAVG command returns the number of averages for the 8560 series of analyzers.  
345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
VAVG Video Average  
NOTE  
There are a few differences in the way video averaging works in the N9061A  
application compared to the legacy analyzers. See the following table for a  
summary of these differences.  
Table 4-28  
Legacy Analyzers - Video Averaging Behavioral Differences  
Condition  
Legacy Spectrum Analyzers  
N9061A application  
All conditions.  
8566 and 8568 only - Original Only displays the averaged trace.  
trace is displayed in Trace C.  
The averaged trace is displayed  
in Trace A.  
Average Count value set to 0. Cannot be set to 0.  
Video averaging is turned off if  
the Averaging Count is set to 0.  
Change in Average Count  
setting to a higher value.  
8566 and 8568 only -  
Continues counting from  
where the previous value left  
off.  
Resets the counter to zero and  
starts the measurement again.  
Change in average counter  
setting to a lower value.  
8566 and 8568 only - Updates If the new count value has not  
the screen annotation with the  
lower averaging value.  
been reached, continues until the  
new lower count has been  
reached.  
If the new, lower count value has  
already been reached, the  
analyzer will stop and wait until  
you take a new sweep.  
Averaging turned on.  
Change in resolution  
Sweep time remains  
unchanged.  
Sweep time changes due to the  
selection of the sample detector.  
8566 and 8568 only - In single Continues the measurement  
bandwidth, video bandwidth, sweep mode, resets counter to  
without resetting the counter.  
sweep time, reference level  
or attenuation.  
zero and starts the averaging  
again.  
Change in center frequency  
or span.  
In single sweep mode, resets  
counter to zero and starts the  
averaging again. 8566 and  
8568 only - Also reset the  
In single sweep mode the  
X-Series analyzer uses all stored  
averages. Does not reset the  
counter after changes in RBW,  
counter after changes in RBW, VBW, Sweep Time, Ref. Level  
VBW, Sweep Time, Ref. Level and Attenuation.  
and Attenuation.  
NOTE  
For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the functions of the VAVG command are identical to the  
346  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
VB Video Bandwidth  
VB  
Video Bandwidth  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
real  
;
VB  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
SP  
UP  
DN  
AUTO  
MAN  
OA  
MZ  
GZ  
?
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
real  
;
VB  
HZ  
KHZ  
MHZ  
GHZ  
KZ  
SP  
UP  
DN  
OA  
MZ  
GZ  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Specifies the video bandwidth, which is a post-detection, low-pass filter.  
347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
VB Video Bandwidth  
When auto coupled, the video bandwidth is calculated as Resolution Bandwidth x Video Resolution  
Bandwidth Ratio. See the VBO command (page 349) for more details.  
348  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
VBO Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset  
VBO  
Video Bandwidth Coupling Offset  
Syntax  
SP  
;
VBO  
1
-1  
0
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The VBO command specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths which is  
maintained when these bandwidths are coupled. The bandwidths are usually coupled unless the RB  
When 0 is selected, the ratio remains fixed at 1. That is, the resolution bandwidth and the video  
bandwidth are always equal  
When 1 is selected, the video bandwidth is one step higher than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the  
video bandwidth:resolution bandwidth ratio is three.  
When -1 is selected, the video bandwidth is one step lower than the resolution bandwidth. That is, the  
video bandwidth:resolution bandwidth ratio is 0.3.  
349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Programming Commands  
VBR Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio  
VBR  
Video Bandwidth to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio  
Syntax  
;
SP  
SP  
number  
VBR  
LF  
UP  
DN  
OA  
CR  
SP  
,
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The VBR command specifies the relationship between the video and resolution bandwidths that is  
maintained when these bandwidths are coupled.  
NOTE  
VBR uses the legacy signal analyzer settings for video bandwidth only if Mode  
Setup > Preferences> Limit RBW/VBW is set to ON.  
350  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
VIEW View Trace  
VIEW  
View Trace  
Syntax  
8560 series:  
SP  
;
VIEW  
TRA  
TRB  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
8566A/B, 8568A/B:  
SP  
;
VIEW  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
LF  
CR  
SP  
,
Legacy Products  
8560 series, 8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
Displays Trace A or Trace B and stops taking new data into the viewed trace.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
The functions of the VIEW command are identical to the A3 (page 81) and B3  
(page 112) commands. For 8566A/B, 8568A/B, the VIEW command is also  
identical to KSj (page 198).  
TRA corresponds to Trace 1 and TRB corresponds to Trace 2.  
351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Programming Commands  
VIEW View Trace  
For information on the settings of the X-series analyzers when legacy instrument trace settings are sent,  
352  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Commands  
VTL Video Trigger Level  
VTL  
Video Trigger Level  
Syntax  
SP  
number  
;
VTL  
DB  
DBM  
LF  
SP  
DBM V  
DBUV  
UP  
DN  
CR  
SP  
,
MV  
UV  
V
MW  
UW  
W
DM  
?
Legacy Products  
8560 series  
Description  
The VTL command sets the signal level that triggers a sweep.  
Note that setting a value for VTL sets the trigger mode to VIDEO, even if it was not already set to  
353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Programming Commands  
XCH Exchange  
XCH  
Exchange  
Syntax  
SP  
,
;
XCH  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
TRA  
TRB  
TRC  
Legacy Products  
8566A/B, 8568A/B  
Description  
The XCH command exchanges the contents of the source and destination traces. The traces are analyzed  
and adjusted to fit the number of display points on the screen.  
NOTE  
The functions of the XCH TRA,TRB command are identical to the AXB  
The functions of the XCH TRB,TRC command are identical to the BXC  
354  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI  
Language  
355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language  
SCPI Language Basics  
SCPI Language Basics  
This section is not intended to teach you everything about the SCPI (Standard Commands for  
Programmable Instruments) programming language. The SCPI Consortium or IEEE can provide that  
level of detailed information.  
Topics covered in this chapter include:  
For more information refer to:  
IEEE Standard 488.1-2004, IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation.  
New York, NY, 1998.  
IEEE Standard 488.2-2004, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Comment Commands for  
Use with ANSI/IEEE Std488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1998.  
Command Keywords and Syntax  
A typical command is made up of keywords set off by colons. The keywords are followed by parameters  
that can be followed by optional units.  
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1.5 MHZ  
The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters. In the documentation, upper  
case letters indicate the short form of the keyword. The lower case letters, indicate the long form of the  
keyword. Either form may be used in the command.  
Example: Sens:Freq:Star 1.5 mhz  
is the same as SENSE:FREQ:start 1.5 MHz  
NOTE  
The command SENS:FREQU:STARis not valid because FREQUis neither the  
short, nor the long form of the command. Only the short and long forms of the  
keywords are allowed in valid commands.  
Creating Valid Commands  
Commands are not case sensitive and there are often many different ways of writing a particular  
356  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language  
SCPI Language Basics  
command. These are examples of valid commands for a given command syntax:  
Command Syntax  
Sample Valid Commands  
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] <freq> The following sample commands are all identical. They  
all cause the same result.  
Sense:Band:Res 1700  
BANDWIDTH:RESOLUTION 1.7e3  
sens:band 1.7KHZ  
SENS:band 1.7E3Hz  
band 1.7kHz  
bandwidth:RES 1.7e3Hz  
MEASure:SPECtrum[n]?  
MEAS:SPEC?  
Meas:spec?  
meas:spec3?  
The number 3 in the last meas example causes it to  
return different results then the commands above it.  
See the command description for more information.  
[:SENSe]:DETector[:FUNCtion]  
NEGative|POSitive|SAMPle  
DET:FUNC neg  
Detector:Func Pos  
INITiate:CONTinuous ON|OFF|1|0  
The sample commands below are identical.  
INIT:CONT ON  
init:continuous 1  
Special Characters in Commands  
Special  
Meaning  
Example  
Character  
|
A vertical stroke between  
Command:  
parameters indicates  
TRIGger:SOURce  
alternative choices. The effect of EXTernal|INTernal|LINE  
the command is different  
The choices are external, internal,  
depending on which parameter  
and line.  
is selected.  
Ex: TRIG:SOURCE INT  
is one possible command choice.  
357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language  
SCPI Language Basics  
Special  
Meaning  
Example  
Character  
A vertical stroke between  
Command:  
keywords indicates identical  
SENSe:BANDwidth|BWIDth:  
effects exist for both keywords. OFFSet  
The command functions the  
Two identical commands are: Ex1:  
SENSE:BWIDTH:OFFSETEx2:  
SENSE:BAND:OFFSET  
same for either keyword. Only  
one of these keywords is used at  
a time.  
[ ]  
keywords in square brackets are Command:  
optional  
[SENSe:]BANDwidth[:RESolu  
when composing the  
command. These implied  
keywords are executed even if  
they are omitted.  
tion]:AUTO  
The following commands are all  
valid and have identical effects:  
Ex1: bandwidth:auto  
Ex2: band:resolution:auto  
Ex3: sense:bandwidth:auto  
< >  
Angle brackets around a word,  
Command:  
or words, indicates they are not SENS:FREQ <freq>  
to be used literally in the  
command. They represent the  
needed item.  
In this command example the word  
<freq> should be replaced by an  
actual frequency.  
Ex: SENS:FREQ 9.7MHz.  
{ }  
Parameters in braces can  
optionally be used in the  
command either not at all, once,  
or several times.  
Command:  
MEASure:BW <freq>{,level}  
A valid command is:  
meas:BW 6 MHz, 3 dB, 60  
dB  
358  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language  
SCPI Language Basics  
Parameters in Commands  
There are four basic types of parameters: booleans, keywords, variables and arbitrary block program  
data.  
OFF|ON|0|1  
(Boolean)  
This is a two state boolean-type parameter. The numeric value 0 is equivalent to OFF.  
Any numeric value other than 0 is equivalent to ON. The numeric values of 0 or 1 are  
commonly used in the command instead of OFF or ON. Queries of the parameter  
always return a numeric value of 0 or 1.  
keyword  
Units  
The keywords that are allowed for a particular command are defined in the command  
syntax description.  
Numeric variables may include units. The valid units for a command depend on the  
variable type being used. See the following variable descriptions. The indicated  
default units are used if no units are sent. Units can follow the numerical value with,  
or without, a space.  
Variable  
A variable can be entered in exponential format as well as standard numeric format.  
The appropriate range of the variable and its optional units are defined in the  
command description.  
The following keywords may also be used in commands, but not all commands allow  
keyword variables.  
DEFault - resets the parameter to its default value.  
UP - increments the parameter.  
DOWN - decrements the parameter.  
MINimum - sets the parameter to the smallest possible value.  
MAXimum - sets the parameter to the largest possible value.  
The numeric value for the function’s MINimum, MAXimum, or DEFault can be  
queried by adding the keyword to the command in its query form. The keyword must  
be entered following the question mark.  
Example query: SENSE:FREQ:CENTER? MAX  
359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language  
SCPI Language Basics  
Variable Parameters  
<integer>  
<real>  
is an integer value with no units.  
Is a floating point number with no units.  
<freq>  
<bandwidth>  
Is a positive rational number followed by optional units. The default unit is Hertz.  
Acceptable units include: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz.  
<time>  
<seconds>  
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are seconds.  
Acceptable units include: ks, s, ms, us, ns.  
<voltage>  
<current>  
<power>  
<ampl>  
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are Volts.  
Acceptable units include: V, mV, μV, nV  
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are Amperes.  
Acceptable units include: A, mA, μA, nA.  
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are W. Acceptable  
units include: mAW, kW, W, mW, μW, nW, pW.  
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are dBm.  
Acceptable units include: dBm, dBmV, dBμV.  
<rel_power>  
<rel_ampl>  
Is a positive rational number followed by optional units. The default units are dB.  
Acceptable units include: dB.  
<percent>  
Is a rational number between 0 and 100. You can either use no units or use PCT.  
<angle>  
<degrees>  
Is a rational number followed by optional units. The default units are degrees.  
Acceptable units include: DEG, RAD.  
<string>  
Is a series of alpha numeric characters.  
<bit_pattern>  
Specifies a series of bits rather than a numeric value. The bit series is the binary  
representation of a numeric value. There are no units.  
Bit patterns are most often specified as hexadecimal numbers, though octal, binary or  
decimal numbers may also be used. In the SCPI language these numbers are specified  
as:  
Hexadecimal, #Hdddd or #hdddd where ‘d’ represents a hexadecimal digit 0 to 9  
and ‘a’ to ‘f’. So #h14 can be used instead of the decimal number 20.  
Octal, #Odddddd or #odddddd where ‘d’ represents an octal digit 0 to 7. So #o24  
can be used instead of the decimal number 20.  
Binary, #Bdddddddddddddddd or #bdddddddddddddddd where ‘d’ represents a 1  
or 0. So #b10100 can be used instead of the decimal number 20.  
Block Program Data  
Some parameters consist of a block of data. There are a few standard types of block data. Arbitrary  
blocks of program data can also be used.  
360  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language  
SCPI Language Basics  
<trace>  
Is an array of rational numbers corresponding to displayed trace data. See  
FORMat:DATA for information about available data formats.  
A SCPI command often refers to a block of current trace data with a variable name  
such as: Trace1, TRACE2, or trace3, depending on which trace is being accessed.  
<arbitrary block data> Consists of a block of data bytes. The first information sent in the block is an  
ASCII header beginning with #. The block is terminated with a semi-colon. The  
header can be used to determine how many bytes are in the data block. There are no  
units. (You do not get block data if your data type is ASCII, using FORMat:DATA  
ASCIIcommand. Your data is comma separated ASCII values.  
Block data example: suppose the header is #512320.  
The first digit in the header (5) tells you how many additional digits/bytes there are  
in the header.  
The 12320 means 12 thousand, 3 hundred, 20 data bytes follow the header.  
Divide this number of bytes by your current data format (bytes/data point), either 8  
(for real,64), or 4 (for real,32). For this example, if you’re using real64 then there  
are 1540 points in the block.  
Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line  
Multiple commands can be written on the same line, reducing your code space requirement. To do this:  
Commands must be separated with a semicolon (;).  
If the commands are in different subsystems, the key word for the new subsystem must be preceded  
by a colon (:).  
If the commands are in the same subsystem, the full hierarchy of the command key words need not be  
included. The second command can start at the same key word level as the command that was just  
executed.  
SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax  
All binary trace and response data is terminated with <NL><END>, as defined in Section 8.5 of IEEE  
Standard 488.2-1992, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common Commands for Use with  
ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1992. (Although one intent of SCPI is to be interface  
independent, <END> is only defined for IEEE 488 operation.)  
361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
A Brief Introduction to the SCPI Language  
SCPI Language Basics  
The following are some examples of good and bad commands. The examples are created from a  
theoretical instrument with the simple set of commands indicated below:  
[:SENSe]  
:POWer  
[:RF]  
:ATTenuation 40dB  
:TRIGger  
[:SEQuence]  
:EXTernal [1]  
:SLOPe  
POSitive  
[:SENSe]  
:FREQuency  
:STARt  
:POWer  
[:RF]  
:MIXer  
:RANGe  
[:UPPer]  
Bad Command  
Good Command  
PWR:ATT 40dB  
POW:ATT 40dB  
The short form of POWERis POW, not PWR.  
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;MIX:RANG  
-20dBm  
FREQ:STAR  
30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG -20dBm  
The MIX:RANGcommand is in the same :SENSEsubsystem as FREQ, but executing  
the FREQcommand puts you back at the SENSElevel. You must specify POWto get to  
the MIX:RANGcommand.  
FREQ:STAR 30MHz;POW:MIX RANG FREQ:STAR  
-20dBm  
30MHz;POW:MIX:RANG -20dBm  
MIXand RANGrequire a colon to separate them.  
:POW:ATT 40dB;TRIG:FREQ:STAR :POW:ATT 40dB;:FREQ:STAR  
2.3GHz  
:FREQ:STARis in the :SENSEsubsystem, not the :TRIGGERsubsystem.  
:POW:ATT?:FREQ:STAR? :POW:ATT?;:FREQ:STAR?  
2.3GHz  
:POWand FREQare within the same :SENSEsubsystem, but they are two separate  
commands, so they should be separated with a semicolon, not a colon.  
:POW:ATT -5dB;:FREQ:STAR  
10MHz  
:POW:ATT 5dB;:FREQ:STAR  
10MHz  
Attenuation cannot be a negative value.  
362  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Symbols  
measure, 92  
block data  
measurement results, 95  
measurement state, 93  
T weighting, 97  
total power transmitted, 94  
upper, 98  
arbitrary, 361  
identifying block size, 361  
parsing output, 361  
BML, 116  
Numerics  
8560E/EC remote language, 29  
8561E/EC remote language, 29  
8562E/EC remote language, 29  
8563E/EC remote language, 29  
8564E/EC remote language, 29  
8565E/EC remote language, 29  
8-bit bytes, 276, 278  
boolean parameter (commands), 359  
BTC, 117  
ADJALL, 99  
alpha weighting, 83  
AMB, 100  
BXC, 118  
bytes, 276, 278  
AMBPL, 101  
amplitude  
C
in dBm, 183  
C1, 119  
in dBmV, 185  
in dBuv, 187  
C2, 120  
A
CA, 121  
in volts, 189  
A minus B  
carrier off power, 122  
carrier on power, 123  
CARROFF, 122  
CARRON, 123  
center frequency, 124  
marker, 148, 244  
step size, 317  
amplitude marker, 241  
amplitude units, 77, 106  
analyzer command, 76  
angle parameter (variables), 360  
ANNOT, 102  
into A, 100, 120  
off, 119  
plus display line, 101  
A plus B  
to A, 103, 188  
annotation, 102  
off, 208  
A1, 79  
A2, 80  
CF, 124  
on, 209  
A3, 81  
CHANNEL, 126  
channel power, 127  
bandwidth, 128  
channel selection, 126  
CHANPWR, 127  
character EOI, 76  
characters, 76  
output trace, 284  
APB, 103  
A4, 82  
absolute amplitude units, 106  
AC coupling, 175  
AC/DC, 173, 175  
ACPALPHA, 83  
ACPALTCH, 84  
ACPBRPER, 85  
ACPBRWID, 86  
ACPBW, 87  
arbitrary block data, 361  
AT, 104  
attenuation, 104  
coupling, 121  
AUNITS, 106  
auto couple, 108  
AUTOCPL, 108  
average  
CHPWRBW, 128  
clear  
average, 129  
ACPCOMPUTE, 88  
ACPFRQWT, 89  
ACPLOWER, 90  
ACPMAX, 91  
ACPMEAS, 92  
ACPMSTATE, 93  
ACPPWRTX, 94  
ACPRSLTS, 95  
ACPSP, 96  
write, 79, 110, 130  
Clear Log, 34  
video, 345  
AXB, 109  
CLRAVG, 129  
CLRW, 130  
B
Cmd Error, 32, 37  
Cmd Error log softkey, 33  
command  
B minus display line, 114  
B1, 110  
B2, 111  
mnemonic, 76  
B3, 112  
terminators, 76  
ACPT, 97  
B4, 113  
commands  
ACPUPPER, 98  
activate marker, 242  
address  
bandwidth  
boolean parameter, 359  
keyword parameter, 359  
multiple on a line, 361  
parameters, 359  
syntax, 356  
channel power, 128  
marker, 243  
display, 138  
occupied power, 280  
power, 290  
adjacent channel power  
alpha weighting, 83  
alternate channels, 84  
bandwidth, 87  
burst period, 85  
burst width, 86  
channel spacing, 96  
compute, 88  
resolution, 295  
video, 347  
termination, IEEE, 361  
units parameter, 359  
valid commands, 356  
variable parameter, 359  
variable parameter keywords, 359  
continuous sweep, 132, 306  
CONTS, 132  
video coupling offset, 349  
bit_pattern parameter (variables), 360  
BL, 114  
BLANK, 115  
blank  
frequency weighting, 89  
lower, 90  
trace C, 200  
counter  
blank trace, 82, 113, 115  
blanking threshold, 333  
marker, 247  
maximum, 91  
COUPLE, 133  
363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
couple  
frequency, 158  
line, 141  
two 8-bit bytes, 276  
FPKA, 161  
attenuation, 121  
auto, 108  
line enable, 143  
line off, 215  
off, 194  
free run trigger, 326  
free trigger mode, 337  
FREF, 162  
frequency  
step size, 135  
input, 133  
on, 196  
frequency  
resolution bandwidth, 134  
sweep time, 136  
video bandwidth, 137  
couple sweep, 325  
coupling  
read, 146  
center, 124  
DL, 141  
display off, 158  
limit line, 219  
marker, 246  
DLE, 143  
DLYSWP, 144  
documentation, 19  
DONE, 145  
done  
marker readout, 258  
offset, 159, 211  
reference, 162  
span, 314  
AC/DC, 173, 175  
video bandwidth  
parsing, 145  
dotted lines  
optional path, 76  
DR, 146  
CR,o1ff3s4et, 349  
CS, 135  
start, 156  
stop, 157  
CT, 136  
units, 77  
current units, 77  
CV, 137  
frequency parameter (variables), 360  
FS, 163  
E
full span, 163  
E1, 147  
D
E2, 148  
G
DA, 138  
E3, 149  
data  
E4, 150  
GATE, 166  
gate, 166  
arbitrary blocks, 361  
EDITDONE, 151  
data byte, 77  
editdone  
gate control, 167  
gate delay, 168  
gate length, 169  
gate polarity, 170  
GATECTL, 167  
GD, 168  
data byte EOI, 77  
data entry  
limit line editing, 151  
editing, 151  
hold, 172  
editing done, 151  
elapsed time, 154  
end-of-sweep SRQ, 292  
ERR, 152  
data format  
display units, 275  
one 8-bit byte, 278  
real amplitude units, 277  
trace, 332  
getting started, 18  
GL, 169  
error, 152  
errors  
GP, 170  
two 8-bit bytes, 276  
date, 335  
clearing, 34  
GRAT, 171  
graticule, 171  
off, 204  
ET, 154  
set, 310  
EX, 155  
DC coupling, 173  
degree parameter (variables), 360  
delay  
exchange traces, 354  
A and B, 109, 155  
B and C, 118, 197  
excursion  
on, 206  
H
sweep, 144  
hardware broken SRQ, 293  
hardware requirements, 23  
HD, 172  
delete  
marker peak, 257  
current limit line, 221  
external  
delimiter, 77  
trigger, 212, 328  
external trigger mode, 337  
hints  
DELMKBW, 139  
delta marker, 229, 245  
occupied power bandwidth, 139  
step size, 149  
DET, 140  
compatibility, 72  
speed, 72  
F
sweep times, 72  
synchronization, 72  
hold  
FA, 156  
fast preselector peak, 161  
fast preset, 210  
FB, 157  
detection  
data entry, 172  
mode, 140  
maximum, 271  
negative peak, 190  
normal, 184  
FDSP, 158  
minimum, 239  
FOFFSET, 159  
HP8566B remote language, 29  
HP8568B remote language, 29  
positive peak, 186  
sample, 192  
format  
display units, 275  
one 8-bit byte, 278  
real amplitude units, 277  
trace data, 332  
digit, 77  
I
display  
I1, 173  
address, 138  
364  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
I2, 175  
L
frequency counter, 247  
frequency counter off, 232  
frequency counter on, 233  
frequency output, 238  
minimum, 205, 250  
next peak, 199  
ID, 177  
L0, 215  
identify remote language, 177  
IEEE command termination, 361  
IF adjustment, 99  
illegal command SRQ, 291  
impedance  
legacy instrument selection, 29  
level  
mixer, 267  
reference, 301  
noise, 252  
reference offset, 304  
video trigger, 353  
LG, 217  
units, 77  
noise off, 201  
input  
noise on, 203  
attenuation, 104  
normal, 228, 251  
occupied power bandwidth, 139  
off, 227, 253  
licensing, 25  
coupling, 133  
licensing N9061A, 25  
LIMF, 219  
input attenuation, 35  
installing N9061A, 25  
instrument preset, 178  
integer variable (variables), 360  
IP, 178  
peak, 147, 255  
LIMIFAIL, 220  
LIMIPURGE, 221  
LIMIREL, 222  
limit  
peak excursion, 257  
position, 254  
readout, 258  
reference level, 150  
span, 207  
lower amplitude, 223  
upper amplitude, 225  
limit line  
K
step size, 149, 262  
threshold, 256  
keyword parameter (commands), 359  
KS(, 181  
delete current, 221  
frequency value, 219  
relative, 222  
time, 263  
KS), 182  
to center frequency, 148  
to reference level, 150, 260  
to span, 261  
KS,, 179  
limits failed, 220  
LIML, 223  
KS=, 180  
KSA, 183  
KSa, 184  
trace, 264  
LIMTSL, 224  
track, 265  
LIMU, 225  
KSB, 185  
KSb, 186  
KSC, 187  
KSc, 188  
track off, 269  
line trigger, 327  
line trigger mode, 337  
linear scale, 226  
LN, 226  
track on, 270  
type, 266  
zoom, 230  
KSD, 189  
KSd, 190  
KSE, 191  
KSe, 192  
marker counter resolution, 180  
marker frequency counter off, 232  
marker frequency counter on, 233  
marker minimum, 205  
marker noise off, 201  
marker noise on, 203  
marker readout, 258  
marker readout in frequency, 258  
marker span, 207  
marker to next peak, 199  
marker trace, 264  
max mixer level, 35  
maximum adjacent channel power, 91  
maximum hold, 80, 111, 271  
MC0, 232  
LO adjustment, 99  
LO and IF adjustment, 99  
loading N9061A, 25  
lock registers, 181  
log file, 33  
KSG, 193  
KSg, 194  
KSH, 195  
KSh, 196  
KSi, 197  
logarithmic scale, 217  
logging, 33  
lower adjacent channel power, 90  
lower-limit amplitude, 223  
lsb length, 77  
KSj, 198  
KSK, 199  
KSk, 200  
KSL, 201  
KSl, 202  
M
M1, 227  
KSM, 203  
KSm, 204  
KSN, 205  
KSn, 206  
KSO, 207  
KSo, 208  
KSp, 209  
KST, 210  
KSV, 211  
KSx, 212  
KSy, 213  
KSZ, 214  
M2, 228  
M3, 229  
MC1, 233  
M4, 230  
MDS, 234  
MA, 231  
MEAN, 235  
marker  
mean  
activate, 242  
power measurement, 236  
amplitude, 241  
amplitude output, 231  
bandwidth, 243  
center frequency, 148, 244  
counter resolution, 248  
delta, 229, 245  
delta step size, 149  
frequency, 246  
trace, 235  
MEANPWR, 236  
MEAS, 237  
measurement  
data size, 234  
MF, 238  
MINH, 239  
365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
minimum  
O
preset  
hold, 239  
fast, 210  
O1, 275  
marker, 205, 250  
x position, 240  
MINPOS, 240  
mixer level, 179, 267  
MKA, 241  
preset instrument, 178  
PRINT, 289  
O2, 276  
O3, 277  
programming  
O4, 278  
command parameters, 359  
command syntax, 356  
SCPI basics, 356  
valid commands, 356  
PWRBW, 290  
OA, 279  
OCCUP, 280  
MKACT, 242  
MKBW, 243  
MKCF, 244  
MKD, 245  
occupied power bandwidth, 280  
occupied power bandwidth within delta  
marker, 139  
offset  
MKF, 246  
Q
frequency, 159, 211  
reference level, 214, 304  
video bandwidth  
MKFC, 247  
MKFCR, 248  
MKMIN, 250  
MKN, 251  
query  
status byte, 320  
OL,co28u1pling, 349  
sweep, 237  
MKNOISE, 252  
MKOFF, 253  
MKP, 254  
OT, 284  
R
output data, identifying block size, 361  
output learn string, 281  
output termination, 77  
output trace annotations, 284  
R1, 291  
R2, 292  
MKPK, 255  
MKPT, 256  
MKPX, 257  
MKREAD, 258  
MKRL, 260  
MKSP, 261  
MKSS, 262  
MKT, 263  
R3, 293  
R4, 294  
ratio  
P
VBW/RBW, 350  
parameter (variables), 360  
parameters (commands), 359  
parameters, variable, 360  
parsing done, 145  
peak  
RB, 134, 295  
RBR, 297  
RBW to span ratio, 297  
RBW/VBW, 35  
RC, 298  
MKTRACE, 264  
MKTRACK, 265  
MKTYPE, 266  
ML, 267  
excursion marker, 257  
marker, 147, 255  
negative peak detection, 190  
pre-selector, 288  
peak position, 286  
PEAKS, 285  
RCLS, 299  
readout  
marker, 258  
mnemonic  
recall last state, 298  
recall state, 299  
recommended path, 76  
reference level, 301  
marker to, 150, 260  
normalized, 273  
offset, 304  
command, 76  
msb length, 77  
MT0, 269  
peaks, 285  
MT1, 270  
percent occupied power bandwidth,  
MXMH, 271  
percent parameter (variables), 360  
phase parameter (variables), 360  
PKPOS, 286  
N
reference level offset, 214  
reference position  
normalized, 274  
Refresh log file, 34  
relative limit lines, 222  
relative power parameter (variables),  
N9061A-2FP - installation, 25  
negative peak detection, 190  
noise  
PLOT, 287  
polarity  
marker, 252  
trigger, 342  
marker off, 201  
position  
marker on, 203  
minimum x, 240  
positive peak detection, 186  
power  
measurement, 252  
signal to noise ratio, 252  
normal  
remote language  
8560E/EC, 29  
8561E/EC, 29  
8562E/EC, 29  
8563E/EC, 29  
8564E/EC, 29  
8565E/EC, 29  
HP8566B, 29  
bandwidth, 290  
detection, 184  
carrier off, 122  
marker, 228, 251  
normalize trace data, 272  
normalized reference level, 273  
normalized reference position, 274  
NORMLIZE, 272  
NRL, 273  
carrier on, 123  
channel, 127  
percent occupied bandwidth, 280  
power measurement  
mean, 236  
HP8568B, 29  
power parameter (variables), 360  
PP, 288  
selection, 29  
NRPOS, 274  
repeating syntax element, 76  
request service conditions, 305  
number syntax, 77  
pre-selector peak, 288  
366  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
reserved words, 76  
resolution  
marker counter, 180, 248  
resolution bandwidth, 295  
coupling, 134  
SER, 309  
recall, 298, 299  
save, 308, 324  
trace, 343  
serial number, 309  
service and calibration, 40  
service request, 316  
set  
status byte query, 320  
STB, 320  
to span ratio, 297  
video bandwidth ratio, 350  
results data, identifying block size, 361  
returning or storing trace values, 330,  
REV, 300  
date, 310  
STDEV, 321  
RF coupling to AC, 175  
RF coupling to DC, 173  
time, 311  
step size  
center frequency, 317  
marker, 262  
SETDATE, 310  
SETTIME, 311  
setting the marker counter resolution,  
stop frequency, 157  
string parameter (variables), 360  
SUM, 322  
revision, 300  
RL, 301  
sum of traces, 322  
SV, 324  
RMS, 303  
shipment  
ROFFSET, 304  
verification list, 19  
signal-to-noise ratio, 252  
single sweep, 307, 313  
SMOOTH, 312  
smooth trace, 312  
SNGLS, 313  
sweep  
root mean square value, 303  
RQS, 305  
continuous, 132, 306  
couple, 325  
rules and limitations, 20  
ac/dc coupling, 20  
couplings, 21  
delay, 144  
query, 237  
single, 307, 313  
take, 344  
markers, 21  
softkeys  
numeric ranges, 20  
parsing, 21  
8560 Series, 29  
8560E/EC, 29  
8561E/EC, 29  
8562E/EC, 29  
8563E/EC, 29  
8564E/EC, 29  
8565E/EC, 29  
Atten Offset, 35  
Clear Log, 34  
time, 318  
sweep time coupling, 136  
SWPCPL, 325  
syntax elements, 76  
syntax for commands, 76  
predefined functions, 21  
remote control, 20  
returning data, 20  
supported commands, 22  
units, 20  
T
upsupported commands and queries,  
T weighting  
adjacent channel power, 97  
T1, 326  
user-defined functions, 21  
Cmd Error Log, 33  
HP8566B, 29  
T2, 327  
HP8568B, 29  
S
T3, 328  
Limit RBW/VBW, 35  
Next Page, 33  
Previous Page, 33  
Refresh, 34  
S1, 306  
T4, 329  
S2, 307  
TA, 330  
sample detection, 192  
save state, 308, 324  
SAVES, 308  
take sweep, 344  
TB, 331  
SP, 314  
TDF, 332  
span, 297, 314  
frequency, 314  
full, 163  
saving analyzer state, 281  
terminators  
scale  
command, 76  
linear, 226  
TH, 333  
marker, 207, 261  
span zoom, 230  
special, 76  
logarithmic, 217  
SCPI commands, 38  
SCPI language  
THE, 334  
threshold, 333  
marker, 256  
threshold enable, 334  
time, 335  
numbers, 76  
basic info, 356  
SRQ, 316  
command parameters, 359  
command syntax, 356  
keyword parameters, 359  
valid commands, 356  
screen title, 336  
display, 336  
end-of-sweep, 292  
hardware broken, 293  
illegal command, 291  
units-key-pressed, 294  
user-defined, 316  
SS, 317  
elapsed, 154  
marker, 263  
set, 311  
units, 77  
time date, 335  
time parameter (variables), 360  
TIMEDATE, 335  
time-gating, 166  
tips  
scrolling log file, 33  
secondary keywords, 76  
select remote language, 29  
selection  
ST, 318  
standard deviation of trace amplitudes,  
start frequency, 156  
state  
channel, 126  
compatibility, 72  
send commands, 37  
speed, 72  
367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
sweep times, 72  
synchronization, 72  
TITLE, 336  
U
W
units, 77  
website  
firmware updates, 19  
units parameter (commands), 359  
units-key-pressed SRQ, 294  
unlock registers, 182  
upper adjacent channel power, 98  
upper-limit amplitude, 225  
URL  
title, 336  
title mode, 191  
TM, 337  
X
XCH, 354  
TRA, 338  
trace  
Z
A plus B to A, 188  
signal analyzer updates, 19  
blank, 82, 115  
zoom marker, 230  
user-defined SRQ, 316  
blank trace C, 200  
data format, 332  
data I/O, 330, 331, 338, 339  
data input, 340  
V
variable parameter (commands), 359  
variables  
data output, 340  
exchange, 354  
angle parameter, 360  
bit_data parameter, 360  
degree parameter, 360  
frequency parameter, 360  
integer parameter, 360  
parameters, 360  
exchange B and C, 197  
mean, 235  
output annotations, 284  
returning values, 330, 331, 338,  
percent parameter, 360  
phase parameter, 360  
power parameter, 360  
relative power parameter, 360  
string parameter, 360  
time parameter, 360  
voltage parameter, 360  
VAVG, 345  
smooth, 312  
standard deviation of amplitudes,  
state, 343  
storing values, 330, 331, 338, 339,  
transfer B to C, 202  
view, 81, 112  
VB, 347  
view trace C, 198  
trace B minus display line, 116  
trace data format, 361  
trace data input, 340  
trace data input and output, 340  
trace data output, 340  
trace display, 341  
trace marker, 264  
track marker, 265  
transfer traces  
VBO, 349  
VBR, 350  
VBW/RBW ratio, 350  
video average, 345  
video averaging  
off, 195  
on, 193  
video bandwidth, 347  
coupling, 137  
coupling offset, 349  
video bandwidth to resolution  
bandwidth ratio, 350  
video trigger, 213, 329  
video trigger level, 353  
video trigger mode, 337  
VIEW, 351  
B to C, 117, 202  
TRB, 339  
TRC, 340  
TRCSP, 341  
trigger  
external, 212, 328  
free run, 326  
view  
line, 327  
mode, 81, 112  
mode, 337  
trace, 351  
polarity, 342  
trace C, 198  
video, 213, 329  
video level, 353  
triggering the analyzer, 337  
TRIGPOL, 342  
TRSTAT, 343  
view trace, 81, 112  
view trace, trace  
view, 351  
voltage parameter (variables), 360  
VTL, 353  
TS, 344  
turning logging on, 33  
TV trigger mode, 337  
368  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Acura Embedded Computer Hardware Power Brick CV User Manual
ADTRAN Network Card Nx56 64 Bonding User Manual
AEG Clothes Dryer 57320 User Manual
AEG Range 4006G M User Manual
Allied Telesis Switch AT 9900s User Manual
American Standard Bathroom Aids 2664 User Manual
AMX Switch FG2001 User Manual
Ativa Paper Shredder DQ61BA User Manual
Axis Communications Security Camera P1353E User Manual
Baldor Computer Hardware EXB009A01 User Manual